8. 随念业处解说的注释巴利
8. Anussatikammaṭṭhānaniddesavaṇṇanā
死随念论的注释巴利
Maraṇassatikathāvaṇṇanā
167 “由于它”是指随念天。因为它在六随念中最后被解说,所以是近的,也是现前的。“无间”,是因为它紧接着被解说,所以这样说。为了先显示死,才说“其中,死”等。在这里,虽然依据“老死由二蕴所摄”的说法,应当把诸蕴的破坏——也就是死蕴的灭尽——说为死,但它特别以命根灭尽的方式呈现在修业处的人面前,所以说为“命根的断绝”。因此,在解说中说:“舍弃身躯,命根断绝。”其中,“属于一有的”就是被一有所限定的。“命根的断绝”就是命根相续的断绝,由寿尽等原因而消失。“断灭死”就是阿拉汉相续完全断灭的死。“称为诸行刹那灭的”就是有为法以生灭为限的转起刹那的坏灭、灭尽。“刹那死”就是如所说具有刹那、就在那刹那中可得的死。依于诸蕴相续而假立树等名称,即使那相续未断,由于鲜活等状态消失,也有“死”的说法,这就是“世俗死”。那不是这里所指的。意思是:断灭死、刹那死、世俗死,在这里的死随念中并非所指,因为它们不普遍、不现起、不成为悚惧事。巴利
167.Itoti devatānussatiyā. Sā hi chasu anussatīsu sabbapacchā niddiṭṭhattā āsannā, paccakkhā ca. Anantarāyāti tadanantaraṃ uddiṭṭhattā vuttaṃ. Maraṇassa sati maraṇassatīti maraṇaṃ tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha maraṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Kāmañcettha khandhānaṃ bhedo ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahita’’nti (dhātu. 71) vacanato cutikhandhānaṃ vināso maraṇanti vattabbaṃ, visesato pana taṃ jīvitindriyassa vināsabhāvena kammaṭṭhānikānaṃ paccupatiṭṭhatīti ‘‘jīvitindriyassa upacchedo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha niddese ‘‘kaḷevarassa nikkhepo jīvitindriyassupacchedo’’ti (vibha. 236; dī. ni. 2.390; ma. ni. 1.92, 123). Tattha ekabhavapariyāpannassāti ekena bhavena paricchinnassa. Jīvitindriyassa upacchedoti jīvitindriyappabandhassa vicchedo āyukkhayādivasena antaradhānaṃ. Samucchedamaraṇanti arahato santānassa sabbaso ucchedabhūtaṃ maraṇaṃ. Saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgasaṅkhātanti saṅkhatadhammānaṃ udayavayaparicchinnassa pavattikhaṇassa bhaṅgo nirodhoti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Khaṇikamaraṇanti yathāvuttakhaṇavantaṃ tasmiṃyeva khaṇe labbhamānaṃ maraṇaṃ. Yaṃ khandhappabandhaṃ upādāya rukkhādisamaññā, tasmiṃ anupacchinnepi allatādivigamanaṃ nissāya matavohāro sammutimaraṇaṃ. Na taṃ idha adhippetanti taṃ samucchedakhaṇikasammutimaraṇaṃ idha maraṇānussatiyaṃ nādhippetaṃ abāhullato, anupaṭṭhahanato, asaṃvegavatthuto cāti adhippāyo.
这里指的是死亡作为念的所缘。寿命等耗尽时的死亡,叫“时死”;它们还没耗尽时的死亡,叫“非时死”。“时死由福尽”这句话,是依相应而就殊胜有来说的;若就衰败有来说,就应该说“由罪尽”。巴利
Adhippetaṃ satiyā ārammaṇabhāvena. Āyuādīnaṃ khayakāle maraṇaṃ kālamaraṇaṃ. Tesaṃ aparikkhīṇakāle maraṇaṃ akālamaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Kālamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayenā’’ti idaṃ yathādhikāraṃ sampattibhavavasena vuttaṃ, vipattibhavavasena pana ‘‘pāpakkhayenā’’ti vattabbaṃ.
在寿的相续得以生起的因缘具足这方面,说的是使寿命延续得以运转的食等因缘的具足。由于异熟已经成熟,是说应当给予与自身果报相应的果报已经给予了。由于趣、时、食等具足的缺失,是说像诸天那样趣具足的缺失,像初劫之人那样时具足的缺失,像北俱卢洲人等那样食具足的缺失。以“等”字还包含了气候、精液、血液等。如同现在的人——这个“如同”一词被放在了不恰当的位置,应当连接为:如同现在的人大约百岁的寿量那样,由于寿命耗尽。这样一来,未来也包含了极长的寿命;而过去,则因为有趣具足以及时、食等具足的存在,也有数千年的寿命。应当知道这个区分是依据现在这一劫的情况而说的。迦罗婆王等,以“等”字应当知道包含了难陀夜叉、难陀青年等。上述这一切,就是所说的“时死、非时死,其中又有福尽死、寿尽死、两者俱尽死、横死”等各类死亡,全都包含在其中。巴利
Āyusantānajanakapaccayasampattiyāti āyuppabandhassa pavattāpanakānaṃ āhārādipaccayānaṃ sampattiyaṃ. Vipakkavipākattāti attano phalānurūpaṃ dātabbavipākassa dinnattā. Gatikālāhārādisampattiyāabhāvenāti devānaṃ viya gatisampattiyā, paṭhamakappiyānaṃ viya kālasampattiyā, uttarakurukādīnaṃ viya āhārasampattiyā ca abhāvena. Ādi-saddena utusukkasoṇitādiṃ pariggayhati. Ajjatanakālapurisānaṃ viyāti viya-saddo aṭṭhāne paṭṭhapito, ajjatanakālapurisānaṃ vassasatamattaparimāṇassa viya āyuno khayavasenāti yojanā. Evaṃ hi anāgatepi paramāyuno saṅgaho kato hoti, atīte pana gatisampattiyā viya kālāhārādisampattiyā bhāvena anekavassasahassa parimāṇopi āyu ahosi. Ayañca vibhāgo vattamānassa antarakappassa vasena vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kalāburājādīnanti ādi-saddena nandayakkhanandamāṇavakādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Taṃ sabbampīti yaṃ ‘‘kālamaraṇaṃ akālamaraṇaṃ, tatthāpi puññakkhayamaraṇaṃ āyukkhayamaraṇaṃ ubhayakkhayamaraṇaṃ upakkamamaraṇa’’nti vuttappabhedaṃ maraṇaṃ, taṃ sabbampi.
168 “如理”就是有方法。“作意”就是以死为所缘的作意。为了从反面说明应当用什么方法让作意生起,才说了“不如理地转起”等话。其中,“不如理地转起”是指:不用正确的方法,没有让念、悚惧和智现前,就去随念死亡。而这一切——忧和喜的生起、悚惧的不生起、恐惧的生起——依次是不安住于念、悚惧和智的人所经历的。因为,如果有人忆念智者所说“死对生者来说是必然的”,他就会在那里生起悚惧,并且保持正知;对这样的人,所爱之人死亡等相不会给忧等烦恼留下机会。因此,因为不如理作意转起的人有这些过失,所以。其中,“各处”指森林、坟场等。“被杀死的众生”指被盗贼等杀死,以及自然死亡的众生。“曾见圆满”指曾见圆满者,即曾见圆满者的。“连接”指现前。“某些人”指利根者、以智为先者。巴利
168.Yonisoti upāyena. Manasikāroti maraṇārammaṇo manasikāro. Yena pana upāyena manasikāro pavattetabbo, taṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘ayoniso pavattayato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ayoniso pavattayatoti anupāyena satiṃ, saṃvegaṃ, ñāṇañca anupaṭṭhapetvā maraṇaṃ anussarato. Tadetaṃ sabbampīti sokapāmojjānaṃ uppajjanaṃ, saṃvegassa anuppajjanaṃ, santāsassa uppajjanañca yathākkamaṃ satisaṃvegañāṇaviharato hoti. Yo hi ‘‘maraṇaṃ nāmetaṃ jātassa ekantika’’nti paṇḍitānaṃ vacanaṃ sarati, tattha saṃvegajāto hoti sampajāno ca, tassa iṭṭhajanamaraṇādinimittaṃ sokādayo anokāsāva. Tasmāti yasmā ayoniso manasikāraṃ pavattayato ete dosā, tasmā. Tattha tatthāti araññasusānādīsu. Hatamatasatteti corādīhi hate, sarasena mate ca satte. Diṭṭhapubbā sampatti yesaṃ te diṭṭhapubbasampattī, tesaṃ diṭṭhapubbasampattīnaṃ. Yojetvāti upaṭṭhapetvā. Ekaccassāti tikkhindriyassa ñāṇuttarassa.
169 以杀戮者现前来说:就像杀戮者一再地出现在面前,因为死离得很近。以圆满与失坏来说:就像健康等圆满会失坏一样,生命的圆满也会失坏。以引近来说:因为指出他人的死亡,就把自己的死拉近了。以身多共有来说:因为身体是许多众生共有的。以寿脆弱来说:因为生命是脆弱的。以无定相来说:因为死没有确定的相。以时限决定来说:因为时间是有限的。以刹那短促来说:因为生命的刹那极为短暂。巴利
169.Vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānatoti ghātakassa viya pati pati upaṭṭhānato āsannabhāvato. Sampattivipattitoti ārogyādisampattīnaṃ viya jīvitasampattiyā vipajjanato. Upasaṃharaṇatoti paresaṃ maraṇaṃ dassetvā attano maraṇassa upanayanato. Kāyabahusādhāraṇatoti sarīrassa bahūnaṃ sādhāraṇabhāvato. Āyudubbalatoti jīvitassa dubbalabhāvato. Animittatoti maraṇassa vavatthitanimittābhāvato . Addhānaparicchedatoti kālassa paricchannabhāvato. Khaṇaparittatoti jīvitakkhaṇassa ittarabhāvato.
“如杀者现前”这句话里,“如”字是省略了才这样说的。为了说明这一点,先说了“如杀者现前”,然后展开这个意思,说“正如……”等等。其中,“使行走”就是威吓、做出攻击的样子。“现前”就是走近之后站在旁边。众生是带着老死出生的,所以用“正如蘑菇芽冒出来时不会没有泥土,众生出生时也不会没有老死”这个譬喻来说明。蘑菇芽有时在某处也可能没有泥土,但众生无论如何都不可能没有老死。这样先用譬喻显示了刹那死,为了指出这里真正要说的死,就说了“如是……”等等。或者,针对“如果这些众生是带着老死出生的,那出生之后立刻就该死去”这样的责难,而说了“如是……”等等。“必定死”就是必定会死,或者决定有死。“来自山者”就是从山那边来的。“运载者”就是对于落入水流中的草叶等物,具有极强的运载能力。“确实在流动”就是确实在奔流。“确实在运转”就是确实以水流的方式在运转,不会停住。巴利
Vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānatoti ettha viya-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti dassento ‘‘vadhakassa viya paccupaṭṭhānato’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha cārayamānoti āgurento paharaṇākāraṃ karonto. Paccupaṭṭhitova upagantvā ṭhito samīpe eva. Jarāmaraṇaṃ gahetvāva nibbattanti ‘‘yathā hi ahicchattakamakuḷaṃ uggacchantaṃ paṃsuvirahitaṃ na hoti, evaṃ sattā nibbattantā jarāmaraṇavirahitā na hontī’’ti ettakena upamā. Ahicchattakamakuḷaṃ kadāci katthaci paṃsuvirahitampi bhaveyya, sattā pana kathañcipi jarāmaraṇavirahitā na hontīti khaṇikamaraṇaṃ tāva upamābhāvena dassetvā idhādhippetaṃ maraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā yadime sattā jarāmaraṇaṃ gahetvāva nibbattanti, nibbattisamanantarameva maritabbanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi. Avassaṃ maraṇatoti avassaṃ maritabbato, ekantena maraṇasabbhāvato vā. Pabbateyyāti pabbatato āgatā. Hārahārinīti pavāhe patitassa tiṇapaṇṇādikassa ativiya haraṇasīlā. Sandatevāti savati eva. Vattatevāti pavāhavasena vattati eva na tiṭṭhati.
“于一夜”:在那一个夜晚,应理解为处格用作受格,或者表示完全相续的关系。“第一”:就是最初,在结生的那一刹那。“于胎”:在母胎中。“摩纳婆”:指有情众生。因为大多数众生都在夜里结生,所以用“夜”来指代。“如已升起”:就像已经升起的云一样,或者意思是死亡正面逼近。“他行走”:那个摩纳婆在行走,从第一刹那开始就一直在走。“他行走而不回转”:他这样走着,连一刹那也不停歇,只是一味地走向死亡。巴利
Yamekarattinti yassaṃ ekarattiyaṃ, bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, accantasaṃyoge vā. Paṭhamanti sabbapaṭhamaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe. Gabbheti mātukucchiyaṃ. Māṇavoti satto. Yebhuyyena sattā rattiyaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantīti rattiggahaṇaṃ. Abbhuṭṭhitovāti uṭṭhitaabbho viya, abhimukhabhāvena vā uṭṭhitova maraṇassāti adhippāyo. So yātīti so māṇavo yāti, paṭhamakkhaṇato paṭṭhāya gacchateva. Sa gacchaṃ na nivattatīti so evaṃ gacchanto khaṇamattampi na nivattati, aññadatthu maraṇaṃyeva upagacchati.
“小河”,就是从山上流下来的小溪。“清晨,随水液而有的束缚”,是指前一天白天太阳的热力使水液渗入内部,到了夜里又回到束缚的根部,因水液而湿润松弛,所以清晨时它们的束缚便随着水液。巴利
Kunnadīnanti pabbatato patitānaṃ khuddakanadīnaṃ. Pāto āporasānugatabandhanānanti purimadivase divā sūriyasantāpena anto anupavisitvā puna rattiyaṃ bandhanamūlaṃ upagatena āporasena tintasithilabandhanatāya pāto āporasānugatabandhanānaṃ.
逝去就是越过、消逝。被遮止就是灭去。水就是水,或者指洪流。因为日夜不断流逝,所以生命就被截断;因为生命被截断,所以众生的寿命就耗尽了。跌落是指从树上跌落而产生的恐惧——对那些想站在树上做事的主人来说,或者对已经进入下面的人来说。上升是指上升的征兆。意思是:母亲,请不要阻止我出家。巴利
Accayantīti atikkamanti. Uparujjhatīti nirujjhati. Udakameva odakaṃ, udakoghaṃ vā . Yasmā accayanti ahorattā, tasmā jīvitaṃ uparujjhati. Yasmā jīvitaṃ uparujjhati, tasmā āyu khīyati maccānaṃ. Papatatoti papatanato bhayaṃ sāmikānaṃ rukkhe ṭhatvā kamme viniyuñjitukāmānaṃ, heṭṭhā paviṭṭhānaṃ vā. Uggamanaṃ pati uggamananimittaṃ. Mā maṃ amma nivāraya pabbajjāyāti adhippāyo.
有些人表面上是朋友,其实是敌人,一直在找机会下手,就算天天待在一起,也未必会真的杀害;可是这个(死亡)却一定会杀。为了说明这一点,说了“因为与生俱来”,又说了“因为夺走生命”。巴利
Koci mittamukhasatturandhagavesī saha vattamānopi na haneyya, ayaṃ pana ekaṃsena hanatiyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sahajātiyā āgatato’’ti vatvā ‘‘jīvitaharaṇato cā’’ti vuttaṃ.
170 170.“成就”就是圆满具足。“快乐”就是享有类似天界的受用,并且拥有主宰权,因此具足快乐。“以身束缚”就是由于身体。“无忧”就是无忧大王。“陷入忧愁”就是落到了该忧愁的地步。巴利
170.Nanti sampattiṃ. Sukhīti dibbasadisehi bhogehi, ādhipateyyena ca sukhasamaṅgī. Dehabandhenāti sarīrena. Asokoti asokamahārājā. Sokamāgatoti socitabbataṃ gato.
健康是青春的特征。疾病和衰老是它的终点,就像死亡是生命的终点一样,这是作为例证引出来的,或者作为缘的一部分来说的。世间本身就是世间共住,就像众生居一样;又因为应当共住,众生聚集就是世间共住。随行:就像被仇敌紧跟一样紧随不舍。随入:就像被亲近的人潜入一样进入。被征服:就像被狂象践踏一样被彻底压倒。被击打:就像被鬼类打击一样被打。巴利
Ārogyaṃ yobbanānaṃ. Byādhijarāpariyosānatā jīvitassa maraṇapariyosānatāya udāharaṇavasena ānītā, paccayabhāgavasena vā. Lokoyeva lokasannivāso yathā sattāvāsāti, sannivasitabbatāya vā sattanikāyo lokasannivāso. Anugatoti anubandho paccatthikena viya. Anusaṭoti anupaviṭṭho upavisena viya. Abhibhūtoti ajjhotthaṭo maddahatthīhi viya. Abbhāhatoti pahaṭo bhūtehi viya.
所谓“石”,就是石头做的,不是泥土之类做的。“广大”,是说巨大,长宽有好几由旬。“触天”,正因为广大,所以遍及虚空,充满一切方向。“周行”,就是到处游走。“击碎”,是把被自己打中的东西碾成粉末。“压制”,就是征服、制伏。不论对方是刹帝利等种姓中因族姓、容貌、戒行、多闻或信仰等而被认为尊贵的人,他都不回避任何一个;对那些因这些方面而低贱的首陀罗等,他也不回避任何一个;总之,他把一切都碾碎、捣烂。为了说明棍棒等手段在那里根本用不上,才说了“那里不是象能行走之地”等话。其中,“以咒术战”,是指按阿闼婆吠陀所规定的咒术作战方式。“以财”,是指施舍财物。“或”这个字表示还有没说到的方式,因此也包括“以安抚”和“以离间”。巴利
Selāti silāmayā, na paṃsuādimayā. Vipulāti mahantā anekayojanāyāmavitthārā. Nabhaṃ āhaccāti vipulattā eva ākāsaṃ abhivihacca sabbadisāsu pharitvā. Anupariyeyyunti anuvicareyyuṃ. Nippothentāti attanā āghātitaṃ cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ karontā. Adhivattantīti adhibhavanti. Kulena vā rūpena vā sīlena vā sutena vā saddhādīhi vā seṭṭhoti sambhāvanāya khattiyādīsu na kañci parivajjeti. Tehi eva nihīnoti avamaññamānāya suddādīsu na kañci parivajjeti. Aññadatthu sabbameva abhimaddati nimmathati. Daṇḍādiupāyā ca tattha avisayā evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘na tattha hatthīnaṃ bhūmī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha mantayuddhenāti āthabbaṇavedavihitena mantasaṅgāmappayogena. Dhanenāti dhanadānena. Vā-saddo avuttavikappanattho. Tena sāmaṃ, bhedañca saṅgaṇhāti.
171 跟别人比较自己:拿别人已经死了这件事来对照自己,心想“连他们都死了,何况像我这样的人”,这样就把自己引向死亡。名声大:因为随从众多、财富广大。福德大:因为福德深厚。力量大:因为精进之力强大。优地提罗是法王之子。恰努罗是被大力天摔跤之后杀死的。巴利
171.Parehi saddhiṃ attano upasaṃharaṇatoti parehi matehi saddhiṃ ‘‘tepi nāma matā, kimaṅgaṃ pana mādisā’’ti attano maraṇassa upanayanato. Yasamahattatoti parivāramahattato, vibhavamahattato ca. Puññamahattatoti mahāpuññabhāvato. Thāmamahattatoti vīriyabalamahattato. Yudhiṭṭhilo dhammaputto. Cānuro yo baladevena nibbuddhaṃ katvā mārito.
连同其威力曾见于震动最胜殿、调伏难陀乌巴难达等事迹中的自身神通,他进入了死魔之口。巴利
Saha iddhīhīti vejayantakampananandopanandadamanādīsu diṭṭhānubhāvāhi attano iddhīhi saddhiṃ maccumukhaṃ paviṭṭho.
他们连十六分之一都抵不上,意思是说:把尊者舍利弗长老的慧分成十六份,再从其中取一份分成十六份,所得的那一份就叫“一分”;除了正自觉者以外,其他众生的慧都抵不上这一分。巴利
Kalaṃ nagghanti soḷasinti soḷasannaṃ pūraṇabhāgaṃ na agghanti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – āyasmato therassa sāriputtassa paññaṃ soḷasabhāge katvā tato ekaṃ bhāgaṃ soḷasadhā gahetvā laddhaṃ ekabhāgasaṅkhātaṃ kalaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ ṭhapetvā aññesaṃ sattānaṃ paññā na agghantīti.
一切杂染方面的拔除,对于依正确方法发起精进的人来说是会实现的,所以世尊说“以智与精进之力”。因为正见和正精进成就时,八支圣道也就成就了。由于独一而住,所以像犀牛角一样。不依靠他人的声音教导,自己证悟真实、达到不动,所以是自觉者。巴利
Sabbassāpi saṃkilesapakkhassa samugghāto ñāyena āraddhavīriyassa hotīti āha ‘‘ñāṇavīriyabalenā’’ti. Sammādiṭṭhisammāvāyāmesu hi siddhesu aṭṭhaṅgiko ariyamaggo siddhova hotīti. Ekākībhāvena khaggavisāṇakappā. Paratoghosena vinā sayameva bhūtā paṭividdhākuppāti sayambhuno.
就像手上的金环互相碰撞,又像竹笋不附着在任何地方——依据这样那样的相状和原因来观察。所谓“考察”,就是观察诸法的生起与止息。因为寻求广大的戒蕴等,所以称为“大仙”。所谓“独行居住”,只是指独自居住的生活方式,并不是指戒等成就。以犀牛角作比喻,或者把犀牛角作为共同的比喻,这些人就叫“犀牛角同喻者”。巴利
Hatthagatasuvaṇṇavalayānaṃ aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭanaṃ vaṃsakaḷīrassa katthaci asattatāti evamādikaṃ taṃ taṃ nimittaṃ kāraṇaṃ āgamma. Vīmaṃsantāti pavattinivattiyo upaparikkhantā. Mahantānaṃ sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ esanaṭṭhena mahesayo. Ekacariyanivāsenāti ekacariyanivāsamattena, na sīlādinā. Khaggamigasiṅgasamā upamā yesaṃ, khaggamigasiṅgaṃ vā samūpamā yesaṃ te khaggasiṅgasamūpamā.
他的色身因为具有以铜色指甲、高耸指甲等八十种随好庄严、以善安立之足等三十二种大人相点缀的种种特征,所以奇特稀有,因此称为“八十……色身”。又因为连同习气在内,一切烦恼都已断尽,所以具足戒蕴等一切行相清净的功德宝,成就了法身,因此称为“一切行相……法身”。“处”,指的就是那一刹那。巴利
Tambanakhatuṅganakhatādiasītianubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitehi suppatiṭṭhitapādatādīhi dvattiṃsāya mahāpurisalakkhaṇehi vicitro acchariyabbhuto rūpakāyo etassāti asīti…pe… rūpakāyo. Saha vāsanāya sabbesaṃ kilesānaṃ pahīnattā sabbākāraparisuddhasīlakkhandhādiguṇaratanehi samiddho dhammakāyo etassāti sabbākāra…pe… dhammakāyo. Ṭhānasoti taṅkhaṇeyeva.
“有这样大的威力”,意思是:按照前面所说的色身成就和法身成就,可以知道他的佛威力广大无量、无法测度;他不落入任何人的掌控、不随顺他人,这就是其意趣所在。巴利
Evaṃmahānubhāvassāti evaṃ yathāvuttarūpakāyasampattiyā, dhammakāyasampattiyā ca viññāyamānavipulāparimeyyabuddhānubhāvassa, vasaṃ nāgataṃ anupagamanavasenāti adhippāyo.
死亡是它的共性,所以叫“死共性”;那种状态就是“死共性性”,以这个(方式)。巴利
Maraṇaṃ sāmaññaṃ etassāti maraṇasāmañño, tassa bhāvo maraṇasāmaññatā, tāya.
172 虫群,就是许多虫聚在一起,或者各种虫的类别。衰老,就是到达了衰朽。巴利
172.Kimikulānanti kimisamūhānaṃ, kimijātīnaṃ vā. Jīyantīti jaraṃ pāpuṇanti.
已出离:就是已经超越。已随转:就是跟着去了。它对我成为障碍:像上面所说的那样,不只是死亡,而是当我得到这极难得的机会并安住时,会成为我忆念师教的障碍。受损:就是走向坏灭。就像用刀切割大肢小肢一样,临死时切断关节连接的风,就是刀风。巴利
Nikkhanteti vītivatte. Paṭihitāyāti paccānugatāya. So mamassa antarāyoti sā yathāvuttā na kevalaṃ kālakiriyāva, atha kho mama atidullabhaṃ khaṇaṃ labhitvā ṭhitassa satthusāsanamanasikārassa antarāyo assa bhaveyya. Byāpajjeyyāti vipattiṃ gaccheyya. Satthakena viya aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kantanakā maraṇakāle sandhibandhanacchedanakavātā satthakavātā.
173 “无力”是指力量薄弱。“羸弱”只是同一个意思的另一种说法。这里的“恶”(du)这个字含有“没有”的意思,就像“恶戒者”“恶慧者”等说法里的用法一样。这里说的是寿命。出入息的均匀运行,就是一次又一次地进入和出去。当呼出的鼻息到了外面还没有再吸进来,或者已经吸进来的还没有呼出去,就说成是单一次的出入,应当理解为这是就鼻息本身共同的性质而说的。因为过强、过近等执取方式而失去均匀。没有这些过失,就是行住坐卧四威仪的均匀运行。身体被极冷所制伏而毁坏,应当用摩醯沙罗国等地降雪时节的情况来说明——在那里,众生因为寒冷而身体破裂,寿命终结。身体被极热所制伏而毁坏,应当用在沙漠中因受热逼迫的篮子、放在它上面的上衣,以及踩过儿子而死的女人等事例来说明。大种的均匀运行,就是没有紊乱。地界等的紊乱导致身体发生变异,这将在后面讲界业处的地方说到。适时,是指适合进食的时候,也就是被饥饿所制伏的时候。巴利
173.Abalanti balahīnaṃ. Dubbalanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Abhāvattho hi ayaṃ du-saddo ‘‘dussīlo (a. ni. 5.213; a. ni. 10.75) duppañño’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.449) viya. Tadetaṃ āyu. Assāsapassāsānaṃ samavuttitā aparāparaṃ pavesanikkhamova. Bahi nikkhantanāsikavāte anto apavisante, paviṭṭhe vā anikkhamanteti ekasseva pavesanikkhamo viya vuttaṃ, taṃ nāsikavātabhāvasāmaññenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Adhimattatāya accāsannaadhiṭṭhānādinā. Tadabhāvo hi iriyāpathānaṃ samavuttitā. Atisītena abhibhūtassa kāyassa vipajjanaṃ mahiṃsaraṭṭhādīsu himapātakālena dīpetabbaṃ. Tattha hi sattā sītena bhinnasarīrā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇanti. Atiuṇhena abhibhūtassa vipajjanaṃ marukantāre uṇhābhitattāya pacchiṃ, tattha ṭhapitaṃ upari sāṭakaṃ, puttañca akkamitvā matāya itthiyā dīpetabbaṃ. Mahābhūtānaṃ samavuttitā pakopābhāvo . Pathavīdhātuādīnaṃ pakopena sarīrassa vikārāpatti parato dhātukammaṭṭhānakathāyaṃ āgamissati. Yuttakāleti bhuñjituṃ yuttakāle khuddābhibhūtakāle.
174 “无决定”是指因为时间等原因而无法确定。这里说的“决定”是指划分界限,不是指不混杂的确定,也不是指决断,所以说“因为没有界限”。“不知”就是不被了知。巴利
174.Avavatthānatoti kālādivasena vavatthānābhāvato. Vavatthānanti cettha paricchedo adhippeto, na asaṅkarato vavatthānaṃ, nicchayo cāti āha ‘‘paricchedābhāvato’’ti. Na nāyareti na ñāyanti.
“此后”在这里,“后”是指另一个、别的时间。这样一来,较短的时间也就被包含进去了。这里所说的“后”,是指最长寿量之后那段较短的时间。因为在那之后众生已没有生命,所以不能说“因无决定”。在“如疱、如肉团”等说法里,“疱时、肉团时”等中的“时”要分别搭配。这里的“时”指上午等时段,所以说“即使在上午”等等。应就在此身命终,这是前后关联。方式有多种:比如生在城里的人死在村里,生在村里的人死在城里,生在林中的人死在乡野,生在乡野的人死在林中,如此等等。“从此处死”,就是从这一趣死后;此处,就是这一趣。就像套在机器上的牛:套在机器上的牛不能越过机器,同样,世间也不能越过五趣——这是用这个比喻来说的。巴利
Itoparanti ettha paranti paraṃ aññaṃ kālanti attho. Tena orakālassāpi saṅgaho siddho hoti. Paramāyuto orakālaṃ eva cettha ‘‘para’’nti adhippetaṃ. Tato paraṃ sattānaṃ jīvanassa abhāvato ‘‘vavatthānābhāvato’’ti vattuṃ na sakkāti. Abbudapesītiādīsu ‘‘abbudakāle pesikāle’’tiādinā kāla-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Kāloti idha pubbaṇhādivelā adhippetā. Tenāha ‘‘pubbaṇhepi hī’’tiādi. Idheva dehena patitabbanti sambandho. Anekappakāratoti nagare jātānaṃ gāme, gāme jātānaṃ nagare, vane jātānaṃ janapade, janapade jātānaṃ vanetiādinā anekappakārato. Ito cutenāti ito gatito cutena. Idha imissaṃ gatiyaṃ. Yantayuttagoṇo viyāti yathā yante yuttagoṇo yantaṃ nātivattati, evaṃ loko gatipañcakanti ettakena upamā.
175 “少”或“更多”:从一百岁以上,用“十年或二十年”等说法,还没到第二个百年,就是活得很少的意思。“应当去”:指乾闼婆以结生方式投生。“他世”:就是另一个世界。巴利
175.Appaṃ vā bhiyyoti vassasatato upari ‘‘dasa vā vassāni, vīsati vā’’tiādinā dutiyaṃ vassasataṃ apāpuṇanto appakaṃ vā jīvatīti attho. Gamanīyoti gandhabbo upapajjanavasena. Samparāyoti paraloko.
轻蔑就是轻视、不尊重。那指的是寿命。善士就是善人、有智慧的人。应行就是应当行善行。因此说如头燃者。巴利
Hīḷeyyāti paribhaveyya na sambhāveyya. Nanti āyuṃ. Suporisoti sādhupuriso paññavā. Careyyāti sucaritaṃ careyya. Tenāha ‘‘ādittasīsovā’’ti.
用七种比喻——巴利
Sattahi upamāhīti –
婆罗门,就像草尖上的露珠,太阳一升起就很快消失,不能久留;就像水上的水泡;就像水上的杖痕;就像从山上流下的河,流得很远,水流湍急,冲走一切遇到的东西;就像力气大的人把舌尖上的唾液聚成一团,毫不费力就能吐出来;就像把肉片扔进整天烧热的铁锅里,很快就消失,不能久留;就像要被宰杀的母牛被牵往屠宰场,每抬起一只脚,就离宰杀更近一步,离死亡更近一步。同样地,婆罗门,人的生命就像要被宰杀的母牛一样,短暂、脆弱、充满痛苦、充满烦恼,应当以智慧如实了知,应当行善,应当修梵行,因为生者没有不死的。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, tiṇagge ussāvabindu sūriye uggacchante khippaṃyeva paṭivigacchati, na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ hoti. Udake udakapubbuḷaṃ. Udake daṇḍarāji. Nadī pabbateyyā dūraṅgamā sīghasotā hārahārinī. Balavā puriso jivhagge kheḷapiṇḍaṃ saṃyūhitvā akasireneva vameyya. Divasaṃ santatte ayokaṭāhe maṃsapesi pakkhittā khippaṃyeva paṭivigacchati, na ciraṭṭhitikā hoti. Gāvī vajjhā āghātanaṃ nīyamānā yaṃ yadeva pādaṃ uddharati, santikeva hoti vadhassa, santikeva maraṇassa, evamevaṃ kho, brāhmaṇa, govajjhūpamaṃ jīvitaṃ manussānaṃ parittaṃ lahukaṃ bahudukkhaṃ bahupāyāsaṃ mantāyaṃ boddhabbaṃ, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ, caritabbaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, natthi jātassa amaraṇa’’nti (a. ni. 7.74) –
用这七个已经讲过的譬喻来作装饰。巴利
Evamāgatāhi imāhi sattahi upamāhi alaṅkataṃ.
“日夜”是指一个昼夜。“世尊的教法”是指能让人证得圣道的导师教诫。“我确实做了很多”是指我确实本会为自己做很多利益,本会完成出家该做的事。“那时”是指那个刹那、那段时间。“一钵食”是指足够维持一天生活的钵食。“迟缓”是指缓慢、拖延。“不可信赖”是指不可信任、不可依靠。巴利
Rattindivanti ekaṃ rattindivaṃ. Bhagavato sāsananti ariyamaggapaṭivedhāvahaṃ satthu ovādaṃ. Bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti bahuṃ vata mayā attahitaṃ pabbajitakiccaṃ kataṃ bhaveyya. Tadantaranti taṃ khaṇaṃ tattakaṃ velaṃ. Ekaṃ piṇḍapātanti ekaṃ divasaṃ yāpanappahonakaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ. Dandhanti mandaṃ cirāya. Avissāsiyo avissāsanīyo.
176 176. 只要心还在持续,众生才有“活着”这种说法;而心的刹那是极其短暂的,因为它变化得非常快。正如世尊所说:“比丘们,我看不到任何别的法像心这样快速变化。”(《增支部》1.48;《论事》335)因此,为了说明众生的生命因为只有一个心刹那那么短,所以是轻微而短暂的,就说“从究竟意义上”等话。其中,“从究竟意义上”这句话,否定了“长寿的人活到一百岁”之类关于众生生命延续的说法,因为那种说法只是基于相续的领域、依照世俗言说而成立的。用“极为短暂”这句话——巴利
176. Citte dharanteyeva sattānaṃ jīvitavohāro, cittassa ca atiittaro khaṇo lahuparivattibhāvato. Yathāha bhagavā ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, yathayidaṃ citta’’nti (a. ni. 1.48; kathā. 335). Tasmā sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ ekacittakkhaṇikattā lahusaṃ ittaranti dassento ‘‘paramatthato’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘paramatthato’’ti iminā yāyaṃ ‘‘yo ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasata’’ntiādinā sattānaṃ (dī. ni. 2.7; saṃ. ni. 1.145; a. ni. 7.74) jīvitappavatti vuttā, sā pabandhavisayattā vohāravasenāti taṃ paṭikkhipati. ‘‘Atiparitto’’ti iminā –
比丘们,就像有四个弓箭手,身强力壮,训练有素,技艺精湛,箭术高超,分别站在四个方向。这时有个人走过来说:“我要把这四位站在四方、训练有素、技艺精湛、箭术高超的弓箭手射出的箭,在还没落地之前就一把抓住带回来。”比丘们,那个人的速度,比日月运行的速度更快。比丘们,那个人的速度、日月运行的速度,以及那些在日月前面奔跑的天神的速度,比这些还要更快地,寿行在消尽。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, cattāro daḷhadhammā dhanuggahā susikkhitā katahatthā katūpāsanā catuddisā ṭhitā assu, atha puriso āgaccheyya ‘ahaṃ imesaṃ…pe… katūpāsanānaṃ catuddisā kaṇḍe khitte appatiṭṭhite pathaviyaṃ gahetvā āharissāmī’ti. Yathā ca, bhikkhave, tassa purisassa javo, yathā ca candimasūriyānaṃ javo, tato sīghataro. Yathā ca, bhikkhave, tassa purisassa javo, yathā ca candimasūriyānaṃ javo, yathā ca yā devatā candimasūriyānaṃ purato dhāvanti, tāsaṃ devatānaṃ javo, tato sīghataraṃ āyusaṅkhārā khīyantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.228) –
像这样说了之后,他又否定了“短暂”这个说法。因为在那里,即使说到诸天子头朝下、脚朝上奔跑时,绑在他们头上和脚上的剃刀刀片碰撞落下的时间,相比于色命根的那个刹那,也还算是短暂的;而心的刹那则比那还要短暂得多,根本没有东西可以用来比喻。所以他说:“比丘们,乃至连打个比方都不容易,心是如此迅速转变。”(《增支部》1.48)
“命刹那”就是活命的刹那。实际上仅仅只是一心生起而已,因为从究竟意义来说,众生的命刹那仅仅以一心生起的量就被限定完了。现在为了用比喻说明这个道理,就说“正如所谓”等话。其中,“正在转起”就是正在生起。“一心刹那”就是只有一心刹那那么长。当那个心灭去时,也就是以那个正在生起的心刹那被称为“活着”,当那个心灭去、到达坏灭时,具有那个心的众生就被称为已灭去、已死亡。为了用经文表明所说的这个道理,就说“正如所说”等话。由此显示:在过去、现在、未来三个时态中,从究竟意义来说,众生的生命就是依心刹那而存在的。巴利
Evaṃ vuttaṃ parittampi paṭikkhipati. Tatra hi gamanassādānaṃ devaputtānaṃ heṭṭhupariyena paṭimukhaṃ dhāvantānaṃ sirasi, pāde ca baddhakhuradhārāsannipātatopi parittako rūpajīvitindriyassa so khaṇo vutto, cittassa pana ativiya parittataro, yassa upamāpi natthi. Tenevāha ‘‘yāvañcidaṃ, bhikkhave, upamāpi na sukarā, yāva lahuparivattaṃ citta’’nti (a. ni. 1.48). Jīvitakkhaṇoti jīvanakkhaṇo. Ekacittappavattimattoyeva ekassa cittassa pavattimatteneva sattānaṃ paramatthato jīvanakkhaṇassa paricchinnattā. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya pakāsento ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha pavattamānanti pavattantaṃ. Ekacittakkhaṇikanti ekacittakkhaṇamattavantaṃ. Tasmiṃ citte niruddhamatteti yena vattamānacittakkhaṇena ‘‘jīvatī’’ti vuccati, tasmiṃ citte nirodhaṃ bhaṅgaṃ pattamatte taṃsamaṅgī satto niruddho matoti vuccati. Vuttamevatthaṃ pāḷiyā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena tīsupi kālesu sattānaṃ paramatthato jīvanaṃ nāma cittakkhaṇavasenevāti dasseti.
“命”就是命根。“苦乐”就是苦受和乐受。舍受其实也包含在苦乐里面,因为它也属于可意和不可意的状态。“自身”是指除了命、受、识之外剩下的那些法。“唯”是说它自己,或者说以恒常的方式不混杂。“与一心相应”是指与每一个心相应。按照前面说的,因为只有一个心的刹那,所以命等的刹那极其迅速、极其短暂地流转。巴利
Jīvitanti jīvitindriyaṃ. Sukhadukkhāti sukhadukkhavedanā. Upekkhāpi hi sukhadukkhāsu eva antogadhā iṭṭhāniṭṭhabhāvato. Attabhāvoti jīvitavedanāviññāṇāni ṭhapetvā avasiṭṭhadhammā vuttā. Kevalāti attanā, niccabhāvena vā avomissā. Ekacittasamāyuttāti ekekena cittena sahitā. Lahuso vattati khaṇoti vuttanayena ekacittakkhaṇikatāya lahuko atiittaro jīvitādīnaṃ khaṇo vattati.
那些在临终者死没时,从死亡之后可以称为“已灭”的蕴,就是临终者死没时已灭的蕴。或者,那些在此生流转中安住、持续存在,直到坏灭时才灭去的蕴,就是“或于此处住立者”所指的蕴。这两类蕴全都相似,全都属于同一类。为什么?因为它们已经过去,不再结生,由于不再回来结生而消失。就像死没时的蕴不会回转,在那之前灭去的蕴也是如此。因此,众生的生命只有一个心刹那,这就是这段话的要点。巴利
Ye niruddhā marantassāti cavantassa sattassa cutito uddhaṃ ‘‘niruddhā’’ti vattabbā ye khandhā. Tiṭṭhamānassa vā idhāti ye vā idha pavattiyaṃ tiṭṭhantassa dharantassa bhaṅgappattiyā niruddhā khandhā. Sabbepi sadisā te sabbepi ekasadisā. Kathaṃ? Gatā appaṭisandhikā puna āgantvā paṭisandhānābhāvena vigatā. Yathā hi cutikhandhā na nivattanti, evaṃ tato pubbepi khandhā, tasmā ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitanti adhippāyo.
心还没有生起时,就不算已生,这叫未生。依靠现在正在生起的心而活着,这叫正在活着。因为心坏灭,所以世间称为死。就像死心一样,所有每一种心达到坏灭时,这个世间从究竟意义上说就是死了,因为已灭去的心再也不能结生。尽管如此,依于那些持续存在的心而安立的世俗施设,比如“帝须活着,弗沙活着”这样的说法所指向的相续施设,在这里则是依于究竟法而成为究竟的。正如人们说:“名与姓不会衰老。”巴利
Anibbattena na jātoti anuppannena cittena jāto na hoti ajāto nāma hoti. Paccuppannena vattamānena cittena jīvati jīvamāno nāma hoti. Cittabhaṅgā mato lokoti cuticittassa viya sabbassapi tassa tassa cittassa bhaṅgappattiyā ayaṃ loko paramatthato mato nāma hoti niruddhassa appaṭisandhikattā. Evaṃ santepi paññatti paramatthiyā yā taṃ taṃ dharantaṃ cittaṃ upādāya ‘‘tisso jīvati, phusso jīvatī’’ti vacanappavattiyā visayabhūtā santānapaññatti, sā ettha paramatthiyā paramatthabhūtā. Tathā hi vadanti ‘‘nāmagottaṃ na jīratī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.76).
177 以某种方式。所谓“心”,是指以业处为所缘的心。“获得习行”,是指获得修习上的习行,也就是舍弃向外散乱,以专一的方式只以死为所缘。因此说“念住于死所缘而安立”。自性法的坏灭,正是落入自性法的范畴,所以说“然而所缘是自性法”。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,老死是无常、有为、缘生的”等等。由于能引发悚惧,也就是能生起惊畏,就像大地震动时呈现大变异相那样,随念死时也会一层比一层更强地带来惊惧,因此心在那里无法进入修习的安止。如果只要是自性法就不能达到安止,那么出世间禅以及某些无色禅又怎么成立呢?所以说“然而出世间禅”等。依清净修习的次第,也就是依下分清净的力量所证得的更殊胜的行道智见清净修习,以及依于对一切行厌离、离染等而转向脱离的安止,使与它相对的恶法消失——这样依清净修习的次第,出世间禅就能达到安止。在那里只是超越所缘而已,并不像其他以自性法为所缘的业处那样,需要努力让心等持;而是以已经等持的心,在修习中只须超越所缘,因此即使以自性法为所缘,无色禅也能安止。巴利
177.Aññataraññatarena ākārena. Cittanti kammaṭṭhānārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ. Āsevanaṃ labhatīti bhāvanāsevanaṃ labhati, bahiddhā vikkhepaṃ pahāya ekattavasena maraṇārammaṇameva hotīti. Tenāha ‘‘maraṇārammaṇā sati santiṭṭhatī’’ti. Sabhāvadhammānaṃ bhedo sabhāvadhammagatiko evāti āha ‘‘sabhāvadhammattā pana ārammaṇassā’’ti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ saṅkhataṃ paṭiccasamuppanna’’ntiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.20). Saṃvejanīyattāti saṃvegajananato mahābhūtesu mahāvikāratā viya gayhamānā maraṇaṃ anussariyamānaṃ uparūpari ubbegameva āvahatīti tattha na bhāvanācittaṃ appetuṃ sakkoti. Yadi sabhāvadhammattā appanaṃ na pāpuṇāti, lokuttarajjhānaṃ ekaccāni arūpajjhānāni ca kathanti āha ‘‘lokuttarajjhānaṃ panā’’tiādi. Visuddhibhāvanānukkamavasenāti heṭṭhimavisuddhiyā ānubhāvena adhigatātisayāya paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhibhāvanāya, sabbasaṅkhārehi nibbindanavirajjanādivisaṃyogādhimuttiappanāya ca paṭipakkhabhūtānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ vigamoti evaṃbhūtassa visuddhibhāvanānukkamassa vasena lokuttarajjhānaṃ appanāppattameva hoti. Ārammaṇasamatikkamanamattaṃ tattha hotīti aññesaṃ sabhāvadhammārammaṇakammaṭṭhānānaṃ viya cittassa samādhāne byāpāro natthi. Yathāsamāhitena pana cittena ārammaṇasamatikkamanamattameva bhāvanāya kātabbaṃ, tasmā sabhāvadhammepi āruppajjhānaṃ appetīti.
因为多修悚惧,他恒常不放逸,因此就获得在一切有中都不喜乐的想。因为看到死亡是必然的,他舍弃对生命的贪恋。因为获得无常想,他成为呵责恶行的人,因此也就少积藏,远离垢秽与悭吝。依此而说,就是依于无常想的反复熟习而说。所谓“未修习死亡”,就是未修习死随念。他临终时无畏、不昏乱,更何况因为死想已善加现前。巴利
Satataṃappamatto hoti saṃvegabahulattā, tato evassa sabbabhavesu anabhiratisaññāpaṭilābho. Jīvitanikantiṃ jahāti maraṇassa avassaṃbhāvitādassanato. Pāpagarahī hoti aniccasaññāpaṭilābhato, tato eva asannidhibahulatā, vigatamalamaccheratā ca. Tadanusārenāti aniccasaññāparicayānusārena. Abhāvitamaraṇāti abhāvitamaraṇānussaraṇā. Abhayo asammūḷho kālaṃ karoti pageva maraṇasaññāya sūpaṭṭhitattā.
身至念论的注释巴利
Kāyagatāsatikathāvaṇṇanā
178 178. “诸佛于此出现,所以叫佛出现”,意思是诸佛出现的时间,因此。除了那个时间之外,也就是在其他时候。不是过去生起的,就是未生起的。正因如此,它成了一切外道无法触及的领域。难道苏内陀导师等人,以及其他苦行者和游行者,就不知道身体是“不净”的吗?确实如此,须弥陀苦行者厌嫌身体时曾这样说:巴利
178. Buddhā uppajjanti etthāti buddhuppādo, buddhānaṃ uppajjanakālo, tasmā. Aññatra taṃ ṭhapetvā, aññasmiṃ kāleti attho. Na pavattapubbanti apavattapubbaṃ. Tato eva sabbatitthiyānaṃ avisayabhūtaṃ. Nanu ca sunettasatthārādayo (a. ni. 6.54; 7.66, 73), aññe ca tāpasaparibbājakā sarīraṃ ‘‘asubha’’nti jāniṃsu. Tathā hi sumedhatāpasena sarīraṃ jigucchantena vuttaṃ –
不如让我把这个腐烂发臭、充满各种尸秽的身体
舍弃之后我就离开,不再牵挂,也不再有所求。巴利
‘‘Yannūnimaṃ pūtikāyaṃ, nānākuṇapapūritaṃ; Chaḍḍayitvāna gaccheyyaṃ, anapekkho anatthiko’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.8) –
起初,菩萨和其他苦行者也确实知道身体是“不净”的,但他们不是把它当作禅修业处来了知,所以说“除了佛出现之外”等等。因为如实揭示了身体的自性,所以能让人生起悚惧感。“为义”是指为了现世等种种利益。“为瑜伽安稳”是指从四种束缚中获得安稳。“为念正知”是指让念在一切处都不丢失,以及成就七处正知。“为智见获得”是指证得观智。“为明解脱果作证”是指现证三明、心的解脱涅槃以及四沙门果。因为身至念是证得不死涅槃之因,又具有与不死相似的殊胜安乐,所以被称为“不死”。受用是指以入禅而享受。退失是指丧失胜利。违失是指因未证得而错失。精勤是指成办、完成。以种种方式在诸经中赞叹之后,那身至念业处被开示,这是关联。那么在哪里被开示呢?在《身至念经》中。因为在那里,以“诸比丘,如何修习”等语而有了这番开示。这里简要之义是:诸比丘,以何种方式身至念修习被修习,又以何种方式反复作意,而使入出息禅等得以成办,成为大果报,使那些属于明分之法、可证神通之法、堪忍不喜与喜等得以成就,具有大利益呢?入出息分是指入出息业处的范围。其余诸分亦应如此理解。巴利
Ādi. Kāmaṃ bodhisattā, aññe ca tāpasādayo sarīraṃ ‘‘asubha’’nti jānanti, kammaṭṭhānabhāvena pana na jānanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aññatra buddhuppādā’’tiādi. Saṃvegāya saṃvattati yāthāvato kāyasabhāvappavedanato. Atthāyāti diṭṭhadhammikādiatthāya. Yogakkhemāyāti catūhi yogehi khemabhāvāya. Satisampajaññāyāti sabbattha satiavippavāsāya ca sattaṭṭhāniyasampajaññāya ca. Ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāyāti vipassanāñāṇādhigamāya. Vijjāvimuttiphalasacchikiriyāyāti tisso vijjā, cittassa adhimutti nibbānaṃ, cattāri sāmaññaphalānīti etesaṃ paccakkhakaraṇāya. Amatassa nibbānassa adhigamahetutāya, amatasadisātappakasukhasahitatāya ca kāyagatāsati ‘‘amata’’nti vuttā. Paribhuñjantīti jhānasamāpajjanena vaḷañjanti. Parihīnanti jinaṃ. Viraddhanti anadhigamena virajjhitaṃ. Āraddhanti sādhitaṃ nipphāditaṃ. Anekehi ākārehi tesu tesu suttantesu pasaṃsitvā yaṃ taṃ kāyagatāsatikammaṭṭhānaṃ niddiṭṭhanti sambandho . Kattha pana niddiṭṭhanti? Kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.153 ādayo). Tattha hi ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvitā ca bhikkhave’’tiādinā ayaṃ desanā āgatā. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – bhikkhave, kena pakārena kāyagatāsatibhāvanā bhāvitā, kena ca pakārena punappunaṃ katā ānāpānajjhānādīnaṃ nipphattiyā mahapphalā, tesaṃ tesaṃ vijjābhāgiyānaṃ, abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānañca dhammānaṃ, aratiratisahanatādīnañca saṃsiddhiyā mahānisaṃsā ca hotīti? Ānāpānapabbanti ānāpānakammaṭṭhānāvadhi. Esa nayo sesesupi.
虽然通过界作意这个业处也能成就近行定,但在这里,思惟观察的部分更为殊胜,所以界作意这一节也被说成是“依观而说”。因为“这个身体也是这样的法、这样的性质、这样的不会过去”这段教导,在各地都是配合不净、无常等来开示,目的是揭示身体中的过患,所以说“九种冢墓相等已经说了”。这里说的“在膨胀相等当中”,就是指在那些冢墓节里讲到的膨胀相等。“依入出息念”,就是依入出息念的修习。上文说到“粪、脑”时,脑髓这一部分在这里的巴利圣典中是被归入骨髓一起讲的,为了说明这一点,所以说“把脑髓和骨髓合在一起”。“这里”是指在随念的解说中。“已到达身体的念,或者已在身体中到达的念,就是身至念”——这是说,以念为首的这三十二行相业处,就是这里所指的意思。巴利
Dhātumanasikārakammaṭṭhānena yadipi upacārasamādhi ijjhati, sammasanavāro pana tattha sātisayoti dhātumanasikārapabbampi ‘‘vipassanāvasena vutta’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃbhāvī evaṃanatīto’’ti (dī. ni. 2.379; ma. ni. 1.112) tattha tattha asubhāniccatādīhi saddhiṃ kāye ādīnavassa vibhāvanavasena desanāya āgatattā ‘‘navasivathika…pe… vuttānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha uddhumātakādīsūti etesu sivathikapabbesu āgatauddhumātakādīsu. Ānāpānassativasenāti ānāpānassatibhāvanāvasena. Yo upari ‘‘karīsaṃ matthaluṅga’’nti matthaluṅgakoṭṭhāso gayhati, taṃ idha pāḷiyaṃ (ma. ni. 3.154) aṭṭhimiñjeneva saṅgaṇhitvā desanā āgatāti dassento ‘‘matthaluṅgaṃ aṭṭhimiñjena saṅgahetvā’’ti āha . Idhāti imasmiṃ anussatiniddese. Kāyaṃ gatā, kāye vā gatā sati kāyagatāsatīti satisīsena idaṃ dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ adhippetanti yojanā.
179 四大所造,就是依靠四大种而存在。腐臭身,是指已经腐烂、臭得不能再臭的身体。这是就身体有行走、站立等姿态来说的;或者说,在身体的各个部分中,最下面的是脚掌,所以说“脚掌以上”。横向以皮肤为界——这里有人会问:头发、体毛、指甲,以及皮肤本身,难道不是有不被皮肤包围的部分吗?虽然确实有,但因为身体大部分是以皮肤为界的,所以说身体以皮肤为界,就是这样说的。皮肤是它的边界,所以叫“以皮肤为界”。用这句话,作为身体一部分的皮肤本身已经被包括进来了,而与它相连的头发等,根部是进入皮肤里的,也以皮肤为边界。因此要知道,三十二身分的整个集合,整个身体都称为以皮肤为界。巴利
179.Catumahābhūtikanti catumahābhūtasannissayaṃ. Pūtikāyanti pūtibhūtaṃ paramaduggandhakāyaṃ. Ṭhānagamanāvatthaṃ sarīraṃ sandhāya, tassa vā avayavesu sabbaheṭṭhimaṃ pādatalanti vuttaṃ ‘‘uddhaṃ pādatalā’’ti. Tiriyaṃ tacaparicchinnanti ettha nanu kesalomanakhānaṃ, tacassa ca atacaparicchinnatā atthīti? Kiñcāpi atthi, tacaparicchinnabahulatāya pana kāyassa tacaparicchinnatā hotīti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Taco pariyanto assāti tacapariyantoti etena pana vacanena kāyekadesabhūto taco gahito eva, tappaṭibaddhā ca kesādayo tadanupaviṭṭhamūlā tacapariyantāva hontīti dvattiṃsākārasamūho sabbopi kāyo tacapariyanto vuttoti veditabbo.
“有”这个说法,是因为用语变通的表达才这么说的,或者它只是一个虚词。因此,在三种数当中,那只是它的词形。所以经文说“存在”。那些研究文字的人,在解释身体中的“身”这个词时,也应该按不净集合体这个意义来理解;为了说明这一点,先说了“从不净的积聚来说”,接着又用词源学的方式来说明,所以说了“可厌的”等等。其中,“作为产生处”是因为它是生起的地方。说了“充满种种不同的东西”。为了说明“那些不同的东西是什么呢?通过它们而说种种不净”,于是在圣典中说了“头发、体毛”等等;为了阐明这个意思,注释说“这些头发等三十二种成分”。因为“行相”和“种类”是同一个意思。应当这样理解它们之间的关联:在“此身中有指甲”等等当中,在一切部分里,都以“此身中有”这三个词来关联。巴利
Atthīti vacanavipallāsena vuttaṃ, nipātapadaṃ vā etaṃ. Tasmā tīsupi saṅkhāsu tadevassa rūpaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘saṃvijjantī’’ti. Akkharacintakehi sarīre kāya-saddaṃ vaṇṇantehipi asucisamudāyabhāveneva icchitabboti dassento ‘‘asucisañcayato’’ti vatvā puna naṃ niruttinayena dassetuṃ ‘‘kucchitāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āyabhūtatoti uppattiṭṭhānabhūtattā. ‘‘Pūraṃ nānappakārassā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ke pana te pakārā? Yehi nānappakāraṃ asuci vutta’’nti te kesādike dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘kesā lomā’’tiādi vuttanti imamatthaṃ dīpento āha ‘‘ete kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā’’ti. Ākārā pakārāti hi eko atthoti. Evaṃ sambandhoti ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye nakhā’’tiādinā sabbakoṭṭhāsesu ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye’’ti padattayena sambandho veditabbo.
“周遍”是指横向,或者从四周各处,因为在脚底和发根处都能找到皮肤。“清净状态”是指清净者的本性,或者就是指清净本身。巴利
Paritoti tiriyaṃ, samantato vā pādatalakesamūlesu ca tacassa labbhanato. Sucibhāvanti sucino sabbhāvaṃ, sucimeva vā.
180 通过哪种方式在记诵上变得善巧,这七种方式就称为“记诵善巧”,或者指由它产生的智慧。在作意善巧方面,也是同样的道理。巴利
180. Yena vidhinā uggahe kusalo hoti, so sattavidho vidhi ‘‘uggahakosalla’’nti vuccati, tannibbattaṃ vā ñāṇaṃ. Manasikārakosallepi eseva nayo.
“正在诵习”就是指正在做诵习这件事。据说,他们在四个月里诵习,就靠着诵习这种方式来把握各个部分,三十二身分就按顺序变得越来越清晰地显现出来,不净想也稳定下来了。他们取那个相进入禅那,以禅那为基础来增长观智,从而证悟了见道。所以说“正在诵习的人就成了入流者”。巴利
Sajjhāyantā vāti sajjhāyaṃ karontā eva. Tesaṃ kira cattāro māse sajjhāyantānaṃ sajjhāyamaggeneva koṭṭhāse upadhārentānaṃ paṭipāṭiyā dvattiṃsākārā vibhūtatarā hutvā khāyiṃsu, paṭikkūlasaññā saṇṭhāsi, te tasmiṃ nimitte jhānaṃ appetvā jhānapādakaṃ vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dassanamaggaṃ paṭivijjhiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sajjhāyantā va sotāpannā ahesu’’nti.
“划分”是指按照皮五法等方式来划定界限。因为脑髓中地界偏多,所以说把它放在粪便之后,也就是排在最后。在这里,顺诵是:肉、筋、骨、骨髓、肾;逆诵是:肾、骨髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齿、指甲、体毛、头发。像这样,在肾五法等当中,先说了顺诵,再说逆诵与前文相连贯。而在《破迷论》中,则另外说成三个五日一组、与前三个五日合起来成为六个五日一组的诵习方式,应当理解为这是依据开头和结尾来显示的。因为在顺诵和逆诵中,逆诵都是最后的,或者也可以知道这只是诵习的另一种方式。巴利
Paricchinditvāti tacapañcakādivaseneva paricchedaṃ katvā. Pathavīdhātubahulabhāvato matthaluṅgassa karīsāvasāne tantiāropanamāha. Ettha ca maṃsaṃ, nhāru, aṭṭhi, aṭṭhimiñjaṃ vakkaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ, aṭṭhi, nhāru, maṃsaṃ, taco, dantā, nakhā, lomā, kesāti evaṃ vakkapañcakādīsu anulomasajjhāyaṃ vatvā paṭilomasajjhāyo purimehi sambandho vutto. Svāyaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 356) visuṃ tipañcāhaṃ, purimehi ekato tipañcāhanti chapañcāhaṃ sajjhāyo vutto, tattha ādiantadassanavasena vuttoti daṭṭhabbo. Anulomapaṭilomasajjhāyepi hi paṭilomasajjhāyo antimo hoti, sajjhāyappakārantaraṃ vā etampīti veditabbaṃ.
手链,指的是手指的排列。巴利
Hatthasaṅkhalikāti aṅgulipantimāha.
“以意诵习”说的是以心去思维,也就是那种被称为“默念”的心念活动。或者可以说,正确地诵习就是诵习,意思是思维。由于长时间善巧地运作而变得熟练的业处,当行者转向它并作意时,从开始一直到结束,在任何地方都不会卡住,持续不断地现前;随着这种运作,它的意义也变得越来越清晰明显,所以他说“以语诵习……成为通达的助缘”。“相的通达”就是指不净相的通达。巴利
Manasā sajjhāyoti cittena cintanamāha, yaṃ mānasaṃ ‘‘jappana’’nti vuccati, sammadeva ajjhāyoti vā sajjhāyo, cintananti attho. Cirataraṃ suṭṭhu pavattanena paguṇabhūtā kammaṭṭhānatanti samāvajjitvā manasi karontassa ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā katthaci asajjamānā nirantarameva upaṭṭhāti, tadanusārena tadatthopi vibhūtataro hutvā khāyatīti āha ‘‘vacasā sajjhāyo hi…pe… paṭivedhassa paccayo hotī’’ti. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhassāti asubhalakkhaṇapaṭivedhassa.
对于以厌恶本质来观察的人来说,有些人通过把握颜色的方式,使各个部分得以确定;有些人通过把握形状的方式;有些人通过把握方位划分的方式;有些人通过把握所依处的方式;有些人则通过完全划分把握的方式。因此,从颜色等各方面来观察,能带来善巧把握——这话已经说过了。为了说明这一点,他说:“应当确定头发等的颜色……”等等。巴利
Paṭikkūlasabhāvasallakkhaṇassa kassaci vaṇṇaggahaṇamukhena koṭṭhāsā vavatthānaṃ gacchanti, kassaci saṇṭhānaggahaṇamukhena, kassaci disāvibhāgaggahaṇamukhena, kassaci patiṭṭhitokāsaggahaṇamukhena, kassaci sabbaso paricchijjaggahaṇamukhenāti vaṇṇādito sallakkhaṇaṃ uggahakosallāvahaṃ vuttanti taṃ dassento ‘‘kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇo vavatthapetabbo’’tiādimāha.
属于自己的部分,就是同类部分;用同类部分来划分,就是同类划分,意思是说,通过下方、上方和横向的边界,以及各自所在部分内的发际等来划分。所谓“以不混杂的方式”,就是依与其他部分不混杂的性质。在这里,“非同类”指的是“异类”,而不是指性质相反的同类。这个意思,从“头发”等词本身就能得到。因为词是通过排除其他词义来表达意义的,所以当说“头发”时,就能领会到“非头发不存在”这个意思。那么,什么是那些非头发呢?就是体毛等,而不是瓶等,因为它们已经被排除,不会产生关联。巴利
Attano bhāgo sabhāgo, sabhāgena paricchedo sabhāgaparicchedo, heṭṭhuparitiriyapariyantehi, sakoṭṭhāsikakesantarādīhi ca paricchedoti attho. Amissakatāvasenāti koṭṭhāsantarehi avomissakatāvasena. Asabhāgo hi idha ‘‘visabhāgo’’ti adhippeto, na viruddhasabhāgo. Svāyamattho kesādisaddato eva labbhati. Saddantaratthāpohanavasena saddo atthaṃ vadatīti ‘‘kesā’’ti vutte ‘‘akesā na hontī’’ti ayamattho viññāyati. Ke pana te akesā? Lomādayo, na ca ghaṭādīsu pasaṅgopakaraṇeneva tesaṃ nivattitattā.
之所以只按“厌恶”的方式来说,是因为没有从界差别的共同性来把握。界差别在《波古萨提经》(中部3.342)和《分别论》中的《界分别》巴利(分别论172等)里,另外有单独的解说。对于头发等以颜色显现的人,就是针对那个人,把诸禅那分别说为以头发等的颜色为所缘的遍处。应当了知之后再教导。为了显示所说的这个意义,才说了“在此,依界……”等话。这里的“在此”,是指在厌恶作意这一章节中。因为在《身至念经》(中部3.153等)里,取了厌恶作意的章节之后,在这里开示的是身至念的修习。巴利
Paṭikkūlavaseneva kathitaṃ dhātuvibhāgassa sāmaññatopi agahitattā. Tattheva visuṃ dhātukammaṭṭhānassa kathitattā ca dhātuvibhaṅgo pakkusātisuttaṃ (ma. ni. 3.342) vibhaṅgappakaraṇe dhātuvibhaṅgapāḷi (vibha. 172 ādayo) ca. Yassa vaṇṇato upaṭṭhāti kesādi, taṃ puggalaṃ sandhāya jhānāni kesādīsu vaṇṇakasiṇārammaṇāni vibhattāni. Ñatvā ācikkhitabbanti yadatthaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha dhātuvasenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ paṭikkūlamanasikārapabbe. Kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.153 ādayo) hi paṭikkūlamanasikārapabbaṃ gahetvā idha kāyagatāsatibhāvanā niddisīyati.
181 “非一间隔”的意思是:就算是一间隔,也不该去作意,更何况是二间隔等等。若作意于一间隔,就修不成修习,也达不到通达特相。这是说明其中的关联。巴利
181.Na ekantarikāyāti ekantarikāyapi na manasi kātabbaṃ, pageva dvantarikādināti adhippāyo. Na bhāvanaṃ sampādeti, lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ na pāpuṇāti ekantarikāya manasi karontoti sambandho.
“进入和释放”是指在应当修习、应当放下的道上。因为无法辨认应当取用和应当放下之处,所以必须先问清楚再走。所谓“业处达到终点”,意思是:从最开始一直到终点,都只是作意而已。然而它并不清楚,因为没能好好辨认厌恶的相状。正因为这样,它才不带来殊胜。巴利
Okkamanavissajjananti paṭipajjitabbavissajjetabbe magge. Pucchitvāva gantabbaṃ hoti gahetabbavissajjetabbaṭṭhānassa asallakkhaṇato. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ pāpuṇātīti ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā manasikāramattaṃ hotīti adhippāyo. Avibhūtaṃ pana hoti paṭikkūlākārassa suṭṭhu asallakkhaṇato. Tato eva na visesaṃ āvahati.
业处达不到终点,是因为他只是一个部分一个部分依次作意,所以那些部分只是清清楚楚地显现出来而已。如果他以更强的力度作意其厌恶的一面,业处就可能达到终点;但这个人作意得极其迟缓,连清楚地显现都做不到,又怎么能安住在厌恶的状态里呢?因此说“不能成为证得殊胜的助缘”。巴利
Kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ na gacchatīti paṭipāṭiyā sabbakoṭṭhāse manasi karotoyeva vibhūtā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti. Te sātisayaṃ pāṭikkūlato manasi karontassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ gaccheyya, imassa pana ativiya dandhaṃ manasi karoto vibhūtato upaṭṭhānameva natthi, kuto paṭikkūlatāya saṇṭhānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘visesādhigamassa paccayo na hotī’’ti.
在外部的种种所缘方面:舍弃了应在头发等上修习的“不净、厌恶”这种不净随观,转而以净等角度来执取头发等时,这里的头发等也应理解为就是外部的种种所缘。因为色等以青等角度呈现,具有种种各自不同的本性,所以叫种种所缘,意思是各种不同的所缘。心的不安住、扭曲败坏就是散乱。应当让念善加现前,恭敬地作意业处,从而排除这个散乱。退失就是减损,坏灭就是消失。巴利
Bahiddhāputhuttārammaṇeti ‘‘asuci paṭikkūla’’nti kesādīsu pavattetabbaṃ asubhānupassanaṃ hitvā subhādivasena gayhamānā kesādayopi idha ‘‘bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇamevā’’ti veditabbā. Rūpādayo hi nīlādivasena puthusabhāvatāya puthuttārammaṇaṃ nāma, nānārammaṇanti attho. Asamādhānaṃ cetaso virūpo khepoti vikkhepo. So satiṃ sūpaṭṭhitaṃ katvā sakkaccaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi karontena paṭibāhitabbo. Parihāyatīti hāyati. Paridhaṃsatīti vinassati.
所谓“头发、体毛”这类说法,是随顺世间共同约定而来的。所谓“施设”,就是依靠八种法而假立的概念。超越这些头发等的施设,就是通过厌恶修习去超越、揭开它们。由于它们已被揭开,当身体的各个部分以厌恶的样子显现时,就应当把心安放在“厌恶”上。现在用譬喻来说明这个道理,所以说了“犹如”等话。这里譬喻的对应关系是:犹如人,指的是瑜伽修行者;犹如水井,指的是身体的各个部分;犹如棕榈叶等标记,指的是头发等施设。就像人们靠标记在水井里洗澡、喝水等,瑜伽修行者在修行前期也依靠“头发、体毛”这类施设来作意。就像人们因为经常往来,即使没有标记也能在水井边做事,瑜伽修行者靠作意的力量超越施设,把心安放在厌恶本身之上,并持续修习。所谓“在前期……变得明显”,是说依照“头发、体毛”等这样努力修习时,头发等施设和各个部分的厌恶在前期会一起变得明显。然后,也就是后来修行进入正式行道的时候,应当把心安放在厌恶本身之上,也就是说,应当让修习的心只在各部分呈现厌恶的样子上运作。巴利
Yāayaṃ kesā lomātiādikā lokasaṅketānugatā. Paṇṇattīti aṭṭha dhamme upādāya paṇṇatti. Taṃ kesādipaṇṇattiṃ. Atikkamitvāti paṭikkūlabhāvanāya atikkamitvā ugghāṭetvā. Tassā ugghāṭitattā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ koṭṭhāse paṭikkūlato upaṭṭhahante ‘‘paṭikkūla’’nti cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvento ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādimāha. Tatridaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ – manussā viya yogāvacaro. Udapānaṃ viya koṭṭhāsā. Tālapaṇṇādisaññāṇaṃ viya kesādipaññatti. Tena manussānaṃ udapāne nhānapivanādi viya yogāvacarassa pubbabhāge kesā lomāti paṇṇattivasena manasikāro. Abhiṇhasañcārena manussānaṃ saññāṇena vinā udapāne kiccakaraṇaṃ viya yogāvacarassa manasikārabalena paṇṇattiṃ atikkamitvā paṭikkūlabhāveyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetvā bhāvanānuyogo. Pubbabhāge…pe… pākaṭo hotīti ‘‘kesā lomā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.154) bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa kesādipaññattiyā saddhiṃyeva koṭṭhāsānaṃ paṭikkūlabhāvo pubbabhāge pākaṭo hoti. Athāti pacchā bhāvanāya vīthipaṭipannakāle. Paṭikkūlabhāveyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbanti koṭṭhāsānaṃ paṭikkūlākāreyeva bhāvanācittaṃ pavattetabbaṃ.
次第解脱就是渐次地解脱,意思是:对还不现前的部分,就一部分一部分地不再现前、不再执取,这样来解脱。那么,怎样才算是不现前呢?回答说“对于初学者”等等。所谓“只触及最后那一部分而安住”,这是说这个业处依照传承,从一开始就让作意运转起来,所以才这样说。因为他的作意就像在心里默诵一样,只是略略触及各个部分就过去了,并不是以辨识特征的方式来观察。可是,当他以辨识特征的方式好好观察、作意时,有些部分会现前,有些部分不会现前。为了说明这时修行的方法,所以说“然后他”等等。在这里,他应当先做业处的作意。要做多久呢?直到两个部分现前,而且这两个当中有一个现前得更清楚为止。巴利
Anupubbena muñcanaṃ anupubbamuñcanaṃ, anupaṭṭhahantassa anupaṭṭhahantassa muñcananti attho. Kathaṃ pana anupaṭṭhānaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘ādikammikassā’’tiādi. Pariyosānakoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhatīti idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ tantianusārena ādito kammaṭṭhānamanasikāro pavattatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Tathā hissa manasā sajjhāyo viya manasikāro te te koṭṭhāse āmaṭṭhamatte katvā gacchati, na lakkhaṇasallakkhaṇavasena. Yadā pana ne lakkhaṇasallakkhaṇavasena suṭṭhu upadhārento manasi karoti, tadā keci upaṭṭhahanti, keci na upaṭṭhahanti. Tattha paṭipajjanavidhiṃ dassento ‘‘athassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kammanti manasikārakammaṃ tāva kātabbaṃ. Kīva ciranti? Yāva dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu, tesampi dvinnaṃ eko suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhahati tāva.
就在蹲踞起身之处就地起身,意思是:像前面所说的那样,以在同一处所作的蹲踞,依次落到所有棕榈树上,一次又一次地起身,到达边端的棕榈树和最初的棕榈树,再从那里、从那里,就在那里、那里所作的蹲踞中起身。巴利
Ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāneyevauṭṭhahitvāti pubbe viya ekatthakatāya ukkuṭṭhiyā kamena sabbatālesu patitvā uṭṭhahitvā uṭṭhahitvā pariyantatālaṃ , āditālañca āgantvā tato tato tattha tattheva katāya ukkuṭṭhiyā uṭṭhahitvāti attho.
“二乞食”是指从两户人家那里得到的乞食。巴利
Dve bhikkhāti dvīsu gehesu laddhabhikkhā.
“从安止”是指以安止的方式,在三十二身分中生起安止。在审察安止是于各部分各自分别生起,还是另有其他方式时,说“从安止的部分”,意思就是从一一部份、从一一部份。因此说“于头发等”等。巴利
Appanātoti appanākārato dvattiṃsākāre appanā honti. Kiṃ paccekaṃ koṭṭhāsesu hoti udāhu aññathāti vicāraṇāyaṃ āha ‘‘appanākoṭṭhāsato’’ti, koṭṭhāsato koṭṭhāsatoti attho. Tenāha ‘‘kesādīsū’’tiādi.
上心,就是止观之心。巴利
Adhicittanti samathavipassanācittaṃ.
“已致力于”是指已投入、已结合,“正在修习”就是它的意思。“适时适时”是指一次又一次、在适当的时候。定的相状,就是已被清楚认明的专注状态,也就是定本身。“应当作意”是指应当放在心里,应当让它生起。或者,作为定之因的所缘就是定的相状,应当把心转向它。对策励相和舍相,也是同样的道理。“有处”是省略说法。意思是:那修习的心可能导向懈怠,这种情况是有处、有原因的。或者,那作意的心可能导向懈怠,这种情况是有处、有原因的。“柔软”是指因善修习而变得柔软,也就是达到了自在的状态。正因为柔软,所以才是堪任、适合、适于作业的。“明净”是指因远离随烦恼而清净,也就是纯净的意思。“而且不脆弱”是指由于达到了堪任的状态,所以不是坏灭之法,就像经过净化的黄金一样适于运用。因此说“正确地得定,为了诸漏的灭尽”。巴利
Anuyuttenāti yuttappayuttena, bhāventenāti attho. Kālenakālanti kāle kāle. Samādhinimittaṃ upalakkhitasamādhānākāro samādhi eva. Manasi kātabbanti citte kātabbaṃ, uppādetabbanti attho. Samādhikāraṇaṃ vā ārammaṇaṃ samādhinimittaṃ, taṃ āvajjitabbanti attho. Paggahanimittaupekkhānimittesupi eseva nayo. Ṭhānaṃ atthīti vacanaseso. Taṃ bhāvanā cittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyya, etassa saṃvattanassa ṭhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ atthīti attho. Taṃ vā manasikaraṇacittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyya, etassa ṭhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ atthīti attho. Mudunti subhāvitabhāvena mudubhūtaṃ, vasībhāvappattanti attho. Muduttā eva kammaññaṃ kammakkhamaṃ kammayoggaṃ. Pabhassaranti upakkilesavigamena parisuddhaṃ, pariyodātanti attho. Na ca pabhaṅgūti kammaniyabhāvūpagamanena na ca pabhijjanasabhāvaṃ suddhantaṃ viya suvaṇṇaṃ viniyogakkhamaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sammā samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāyā’’ti.
制火炬就是制作坩埚。涂抹就是点燃、烧起来。且彼是说,那位金匠享受、能够、成办那被称为装饰品制品的目的是利益。或者,金匠享受、获得黄金的利益。巴利
Ukkaṃ bandhatīti mūsaṃ sampādeti. Ālimpetīti ādīpeti jāleti. Tañcāti taṃ piḷandhanavikatisaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ payojanaṃ assa suvaṇṇakārassa anubhoti pahoti sādheti. Assa vā suvaṇṇassa atthaṃ suvaṇṇakāro anubhoti pāpuṇāti.
以神通智等应当亲证的、神通体验等类的,是应当以神通亲证的。谁对它有现前体验,谁就是见证者。见证者的堪能性就是见证堪能性,也就是说,能成为见证者。或者,他既是见证者又是堪能者,所以叫见证堪能者。因为此人堪能神通等,并且在其中是见证者,所以叫见证堪能者;他的这种状态就是见证堪能性,他达到这个状态。当每一个个别的处存在时,即在此彼先前因等的原因存在时。巴利
Abhiññāya iddhividhādiñāṇena sacchikaraṇīyassa iddhividhapaccanubhavanādikassa abhiññā sacchikaraṇīyassa. Yassa paccakkhaṃ atthi, so sakkhi. Sakkhino bhabbatā sakkhibhabbatā, sakkhibhavananti vuttaṃ hoti. Sakkhi ca so bhabbo cāti vā sakkhibhabbo. Ayañhi iddhividhādīnaṃ bhabbo, tattha ca sakkhīti sakkhibhabbo, tassa bhāvo sakkhibhabbatā, taṃ pāpuṇāti. Sati sati āyataneti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pubbahetuādike kāraṇe sati.
“清凉状态”指的是涅槃,或者指烦恼热恼的平息。“抑制”是指:对于掉举的心,为了防止它落入掉举,就抑制它。“策励”是指:对于消沉的心,为了防止它落入懈怠,就策励它。“令欢喜”是指:对于平稳运转的心,用智慧让它在那种运转状态中感到满足,或者激励它。又或者,当心没有滋味、不肯投入修习时,就观察生等令人警醒的事,令心欢喜、激励。“旁观”是指:当心既不消沉也不掉举,正确地进入修习之道时,不对抑制、策励、令欢喜作任何努力,就像车夫面对平稳行进的一对马那样,只是旁观,保持舍心。“志求殊胜”是指:心倾向于殊胜、最上的道与果,朝向、倾向、偏向那边。巴利
Sītibhāvanti nibbānaṃ, kilesadarathavūpasamaṃ vā. Niggaṇhātīti uddhaṭaṃ cittaṃ uddhaccapātato rakkhaṇavasena niggaṇhāti. Paggaṇhātīti līnaṃ cittaṃ kosajjapātato rakkhaṇavasena paggaṇhāti. Sampahaṃsetīti samappavattaṃ cittaṃ tathāpavattiyaṃ paññāya toseti, uttejeti vā. Yadā vā nirassādaṃ cittaṃ bhāvanāya na pakkhandati, tadā jātiādīni saṃvegavatthūni (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.418; itivu. aṭṭha. 37) paccavekkhitvā sampahaṃseti samuttejeti. Ajjhupekkhatīti yadā pana cittaṃ alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ sammadeva bhāvanāvīthiṃ otiṇṇaṃ hoti, tadā paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu kañci byāpāraṃ akatvā samappavattesu yugesu sārathi viya ajjhupekkhati upekkhakova hoti. Paṇītādhimuttikoti paṇīte uttame maggaphale adhimutto ninnapoṇapabbhāro.
把“善取”做到位,意思是:对上面所说的、被称为“学习善巧”的方法,好好地学下来,通过反复诵习等方式牢牢掌握。好好地确定,意思是:对被称为“作意善巧”的方法,以正确观察的方式彻底把握。差别,是指前后修习所产生的殊胜进展。一再地反复温习,意思是:为了让业处文本达到熟练,通过言语和心意一次又一次地反复练习。结节处,就像一棵树或一片森林中难以劈开、密实难入的地方被称为“结节处”一样,业处文本中在意义上难以穿透、密实难解的地方,也被称为“结节处”。要用通过反复请教等方式获得的智慧之斧把它斩断。巴利
Suggahitaṃ katvāti yathāvuttaṃ uggahakosallasaṅkhātaṃ vidhiṃ suṭṭhu uggahitaṃ pariyāpuṇanādinā supariggahitaṃ katvā. Suṭṭhu vavatthapetvāti manasikārakosallasaṅkhātaṃ vidhiṃ sammadeva sallakkhaṇavasena upadhāretvā. Visesanti pubbenāparaṃ bhāvanāya visesaṃ. Punappunaṃ parivattetvāti kammaṭṭhānatantiṃ paguṇabhāvaṃ pāpento bhiyyo bhiyyo vācāya, manasā ca parivattetvā. Gaṇṭhiṭṭhānanti yathā rukkhassa dubbinibhedo araññassa vā gahanabhūto padeso ‘‘gaṇṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati, evaṃ kammaṭṭhānatantiyā atthato dubbinibhedo gahanabhūto ca padeso ‘‘gaṇṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Taṃ paripucchanādiladdhena ñāṇapharasunā chinditvā.
所谓“相”,就是业处之相,也就是不净的呈现方式。为了说明以这样的目的去拔除也没有过失,所以说了“拔除之后”。“在剪除之处”指剃光的地方。以出离的意乐来观察,确实是可以的。“以多数而言”指未结果的或已结果的,以数量多者为准。见到之后就应该取相,因为皮等五处适合观察;对其余的,则要在听闻之后、了知之后取相。巴利
Nimittanti kammaṭṭhānanimittaṃ, asubhākāro. Edisena payojanena luñcanampi anavajjanti dassetuṃ ‘‘luñcitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Chinnaṭṭhāneti muṇḍitaṭṭhāne. Vaṭṭatiyeva nissaraṇajjhāsayena olokanato. Ussadavasenāti aphalitānaṃ, phalitānaṃ vā bahulatāvasena. Disvāva nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ dassanayogyatāya tacapañcakassa, itaresu sutvā ca ñatvā ca nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ.
诸部分的确定之讨论的注释巴利
Koṭṭhāsavavatthāpanakathāvaṇṇanā
182 182. 所谓“新利咤果之色”,就是新鲜利咤果之色。关于“耳尖”,是就耳廓上部边缘的部分而说的。横向彼此分隔,怎么分隔呢?就是两根头发不会合在一起。巴利
182.Addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇāti abhinavāriṭṭhaphalavaṇṇā. Kaṇṇacūḷikāti uparikaṇṇasakkhalikāya parabhāgaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, kathaṃ? Dve kesā ekato natthīti.
Āsaya 是依靠,paccaya 是意思。巴利
Āsayoti nissayo, paccayoti attho.
184 不与别的颜色混杂的纯黑色。巴利
184.Asambhinnakāḷakā aññena vaṇṇena asammissakāḷakā.
185 185. 因为形状像叶片,所以指甲本身就是“指甲叶片”。说“指甲在横向上彼此分隔”,是就它们各自分开、各自成立这一点来说的。为了说明这个意思,才说“两片指甲不可能合在一起”。巴利
185. Pattasadisattā nakhā eva nakhapattāni. Nakhā tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnāti visuṃ vavatthitataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tameva hi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dve nakhā ekato natthī’’ti āha.
186 “齿列”就是牙齿排成的行列。“车辕支撑杆”是车辕位置起支撑作用的木杆。作为牙齿依托的骨,就是颚骨。巴利
186.Dantapāḷiyāti dantāvaliyā. Yānakaupatthambhinīti sakaṭassa dhuraṭṭhāne upatthambhakadaṇḍo. Dantānaṃ ādhārabhūtā aṭṭhi hanukaṭṭhi.
187 被聚集、被压紧。做蚕茧的蚕茧,也叫“蚕丝果”。包缠式鞋子,是盖住整个脚背的鞋。坐垫,就是座位处。箭筒,是装箭的地方。护喉,是喉咙的护具。虫巢,是犀鸟的窝。巴利
187.Saṅkaḍḍhiyamānāti sampiṇḍiyamānā. Kosakārakakoso upalliṇḍupoṭṭalakaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘koseyyaphala’’ntipi vuccati. Puṭabandhaupāhano sakalapiṭṭhipādacchādanaupāhano. Ānisadaṃ āsanapadeso. Tūṇiro sarāvāso. Galakañcukaṃ kaṇṭhattāṇaṃ. Kīṭakulāvakaṃ kharamukhakuṭi.
从顺行和逆行两方面来说:这里,从肩部开始,沿着手臂背侧向下,是顺行;从手腕开始,沿着手臂前侧向上,是逆行。依照同样的方法,也就是按照右手所说的方式,有顺行和逆行两方面的含义。所谓“细的”,是指比前面所说的粗皮更细的。或者在口腔内皮等部位中,因为被皮肤所界定而难以觉察的,就说为“细”。按照所说的方式,用智慧剥开皮肤来观察时,它就会变得清楚。在这里,外皮也属于皮肤这一类,所以说“皮肤上方以虚空为界”。巴利
Anulomena paṭilomena cāti ettha aṃsapadesato paṭṭhāya bāhuno piṭṭhipadesena otaraṇaṃ anulomo, maṇibandhato paṭṭhāya bāhuno purimabhāgena ārohanaṃ paṭilomo. Teneva nayenāti dakkhiṇahatthe vuttena nayena anulomena paṭilomena cāti attho. Sukhumampīti yathāvuttaoḷārikacammato sukhumaṃ. Antomukhacammādikoṭṭhāsesu vā tacena paricchinnattā yaṃ durupalakkhaṇīyaṃ, taṃ ‘‘sukhuma’’nti vuttaṃ. Tañhi vuttanayena ñāṇena tacaṃ vivaritvā passantassa pākaṭaṃ hoti. Idha chavipi tacagatikā evāti ‘‘taco upari ākāsena paricchinno’’ti vutto.
188 小石砧。灶的边沿,就是用泥团做成的灶的边角。所谓“多罗果浆薄片”,是把熟多罗果的汁液涂在多罗叶等上面,晒干后揭取下来的薄层。所谓“细”,是比前面所说的肉更细的。脚跟肉等粗厚部位以及全身瘦弱之处,因为大部分都被肉覆盖着,所以说“横向彼此分隔”。巴利
188.Nisadapoto silāputtako. Uddhanakoṭīti mattikāpiṇḍena katauddhanassa koṭi. Tālaguḷapaṭalaṃ nāma pakkatālaphalalasikaṃ tālapaṭṭikādīsu limpitvā sukkhāpetvā uddharitvā gahitapaṭalaṃ. Sukhumanti yathāvuttamaṃsato sukhumaṃ. Paṇhikamaṃsādithūlānaṃ sakalasarīrassa kisānaṃ yebhuyyena maṃsena paṭicchāditattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinna’’nti.
189 网状紧身衣就是网状的紧身衣。筋腱仅因各自分立之故,而横向彼此分隔。巴利
189. Jālākāro kañcuko jālakañcuko. Visuṃ vavatthitabhāveneva nhārū tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā.
190 因为齿骨是分开来算的,所以说“除了三十二颗齿骨”。说“一块膝骨、一块大腿骨”时以单数形式一并摄取,是因为后面加了“在每一只脚上”这个限定。应当知道,“像这样三种量”等等,是用“量”这类词来指出这里没有提到的臀骨等。这样说来,“超过三百块骨的聚集”这句话也就站得住脚了。巴利
190. Dantānaṃ visuṃ gahitattā ‘‘ṭhapetvā dvattiṃsa dantaṭṭhīnī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekaṃ jaṇṇukaṭṭhi, ekaṃ ūruṭṭhīti eka-ggahaṇaṃ ‘‘ekekasmiṃ pāde’’ti adhikatattā. Evaṃ timattānīti evaṃ mattasaddehi ānisadaṭṭhiādīni idha avuttānipi dassetīti veditabbaṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘atirekatisataaṭṭhikasamussaya’’nti (visuddhi. 1.122) idañca vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti.
用线把游戏用的小球串起来,让它们互相碰撞着玩,这就是游戏球。弓杖,就是孩子们玩的那种小弓。其中,胫骨安立的地方,意思是它进入膝盖骨而停住的位置。由大腿骨所支撑的那个位置,也就是髋骨所在的地方,形状像顶端被切掉的大奔那伽果。巴利
Kīḷāgoḷakāni suttena bandhitvā aññamaññaṃ ghaṭṭetvā kīḷanagoḷakāni. Dhanukadaṇḍo dārakānaṃ kīḷanakakhuddakadhanukaṃ. Tattha jaṅghaṭṭhikassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānanti jaṇṇukaṭṭhimhi pavisitvā ṭhitaṭṭhānanti adhippāyo. Tena ūruṭṭhinā patiṭṭhitaṃ ṭhānaṃ yaṃ kaṭiṭṭhino, taṃ aggacchinnamahāpunnāgaphalasadisaṃ.
陶匠做成的炉子,叫陶匠炉。把铅片包裹物卷绕之后安放的铅制薄板,叫铅制薄板。在用来纺线的纺锤上穿孔安上的圆球,叫纺轮;纺轮的行列,叫纺轮列。巴利
Kumbhakārena nipphāditaṃ uddhanaṃ kumbhakārikauddhanaṃ. Sīsakapaṭṭaveṭhakaṃ veṭhetvā ṭhapitaṃ sīsamayaṃ paṭṭakaṃ. Yena suttaṃ kantanti, tasmiṃ takkamhi vijjhitvā ṭhapitagoḷakā vaṭṭanā nāma, vaṭṭanānaṃ āvaḷi vaṭṭanāvaḷi.
把竹笋切成环状的一段段,就是竹笋圆轮。用来刮削的刀,是刮削甘蔗皮用的刀。巴利
Maṇḍalākārena chinnavaṃsakaḷīrakhaṇḍāni vaṃsakaḷīracakkalakāni. Avalekhanasatthakaṃ ucchutacāvalekhanasatthakaṃ.
192 以肾脏部分为界限,就是由肾脏边缘的那一部分所限定。从这里往后,遇到同类情形,也都按同样的方法来理解。巴利
192.Vakkabhāgena paricchinnanti vakkapariyantena bhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ito paresupi evarūpesu eseva nayo.
193 所谓“依止于何”,就是依止血液;依止之依止也被称为“依止”。因为即使只是原因的原因,也可以使用原因这个说法,比如“村庄被贼烧了”。或者,在某个色聚中,心脏依处也成为属血液一类而住,因此说“依止于何”。巴利
193.Yaṃnissāyāti yaṃ lohitaṃ nissāya, nissayanissayopi ‘‘nissayo’’tveva vuccati. Bhavati hi kāraṇakāraṇepi kāraṇavohāro yathā ‘‘corehi gāmo daḍḍho’’ti. Atha vā yasmiṃ rūpakalāpe hadayavatthu , tampi lohitagatikameva hutvā tiṭṭhatīti ‘‘yaṃ nissāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
194 淡黄色界,就是指淡黄色的本质。巴利
194.Paṇḍukadhātukanti paṇḍusabhāvaṃ.
195 覆盖肉,指的是起遮盖作用的肉。巴利
195.Pariyonahanamaṃsanti paṭicchādakamaṃsaṃ.
196 “腹舌肉”是指位于腹部顶端侧边、形状像舌头的肉。说完“青色”之后,因为青色有很多种,所以他说“像黄荆花的颜色”。巴利
196.Udarajivhāmaṃsanti jivhāsaṇṭhānaṃ udarassa matthakapasse tiṭṭhanakamaṃsaṃ. ‘‘Nīla’’nti vatvā nīlaṃ nāma bahudhātukanti āha ‘‘nigguṇḍipupphavaṇṇa’’nti.
197 “肺肉”是指还挂在原来的位置上、稍微翻转了一点的肉。“无味”就是味道很差。“无光泽”就是没有光彩,或者缺少精气。巴利
197.Papphāsamaṃsanti yathāṭhāne eva lambitvā thokaṃ parivattakamaṃsaṃ. Nirasanti nihīnarasaṃ. Nirojanti nippabhaṃ, ojārahitaṃ vā.
198 弯曲,是指弯折之后立在那里。如石灰石之色,是指用石灰石做成的灰泥之色。也有写成“如白石灰石之色”,意思是白色石灰石之色,以及灰泥之色。巴利
198.Obhaggāti avabhujitvā ṭhitā. Sakkharasudhāvaṇṇanti marumbehi katasudhāvaṇṇaṃ. ‘‘Setasakkharasudhāvaṇṇa’’ntipi pāṭho, setasakkharavaṇṇaṃ, sudhāvaṇṇañcāti attho.
199 肠在弯曲又弯曲之后所停立的部位,就是肠的弯转处。为了说明那些部位上起绑缚作用的东西名叫“肠索”,所以说“肠索就是在肠弯转处的绑缚”。就像做锄头、斧头等活儿时,肠的弯转处不滑脱,就把它们绑在一起,像什么呢?就像机械的线绳绑住机械板片一样。那又像什么停立在那里呢?说“像擦脚布……停立”。这里应当知道,前者是绑缚的比喻,后者是停立形态的比喻。巴利
199. Antassa ābhujitvā ābhujitvā ṭhitappadesā antabhogaṭṭhānāni. Tesaṃ bandhanabhūtaṃ antaguṇaṃ nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘antaguṇanti antabhogaṭṭhānesu bandhana’’nti. Kuddālapharasukammādīni karontānaṃ antabhoge agaḷante ekato ābandhitvā, kiṃ viya? Yantasuttakamiva yantaphalakānīti. Kimiva tattha ṭhitanti āha ‘‘pādapuñchana…pe… ṭhita’’nti. Purimañcettha ābandhanassa, dutiyaṃ ṭhānākārassa nidassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
200 所谓“所食”,就是吃下去的米饭等。所谓“所饮”,就是通过喝而吞下的饮料等。所谓“所嚼”,就是咀嚼过的粉食、根、果实、硬食等。所谓“所尝”,就是品尝过的熟芒果、蜂蜜、糖蜜等。巴利
200.Asitaṃ nāma bhuttaṃ odanādi. Pītaṃ nāma pivanavasena ajjhohaṭapānakādi. Khāyitaṃ nāma saṃkhāditaṃ piṭṭhamūlaphalakhajjādi. Sāyitaṃ nāma assāditaṃ ambapakkamadhuphāṇitādi.
Yattha是指在那个腹部中。Yaṃ则直接回指腹部本身。关联是:饮食等落入那里后停住。Suvānavamathu是指狗的呕吐物。Viveka是指分开、区分。巴利
Yatthāti yasmiṃ udare. Yanti ca udarameva paccāmasati. Yattha pānabhojanādīni patitvā tiṭṭhatīti sambandho. Suvānavamathu sārameyyavantaṃ. Vivekanti vibhāgaṃ.
201 在脐下与脊骨根之间:按身体前侧来说,是在肚脐下方的位置;按身体后侧来说,是在下段脊骨的正中间。意思是指像竹管一样的那个部位。巴利
201.Heṭṭhānābhipiṭṭhikaṇṭakamūlānaṃantareti purimabhāgavasena nābhiyā heṭṭhāpadesassa pacchimabhāgavasena heṭṭhimapiṭṭhikaṇṭakānaṃ vemajjhe. Veḷunāḷikasadiso padesoti adhippāyo.
202 已聚集:就是堆积起来的。巴利
202.Samohitanti nicitaṃ.
204 204. 已经变成腐烂状态的鸡蛋,就是腐鸡卵。Uddeko:没有胆汁等混杂、纯粹是向上运行的风。巴利
204. Pūtibhāvaṃ āpannaṃ kukkuṭaṇḍaṃ pūtikukkuṭaṇḍaṃ. Uddeko pittādīhi vinā kevalo uddhaṅgamavāto.
205 未滤干的酸粥。巴利
205.Ācāmo avassāvanakañjikaṃ.
206 206.“肾、心、肝、肺被湿润”这一句里,应当这样理解:肝只是靠下方部分充满而湿润,其余那些器官则是靠上方一点一点滴流下来而湿润。巴利
206.Vakkahadayayakanapapphāse temayamānanti ettha yakanaṃ heṭṭhābhāgapūraṇeneva temeti, itarāni tesaṃ upari thokaṃ thokaṃ paggharaṇenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
207 207. 时节变异,是由炎热、云等引起的。就像被不均匀割断的莲藕束等,水会不均匀地流出来;同样,为了说明身体从毛孔等缝隙中,向上、向下、横向都有汗不均匀地流出,所以用了“不均匀割断”这个说法。巴利
207.Utuvikāro uṇhavalāhakādihetuko. Visamacchinno bhisādikalāpo visamaṃ udakaṃ paggharati, evamevaṃ sarīraṃ kesakūpādivivarehi upari, heṭṭhā, tiriyañca sedaṃ visamaṃ paggharatīti dassetuṃ visamacchinna-ggahaṇaṃ kataṃ.
208 208.“不相称的食物”:指对当时身体状态不适合的食物,或者过于辛辣、过热等性质相冲突的食物。不过在《迷惑冰消》里,只说是“性质相冲突的食物”,因为对当时现起的诸界来说,它的性质是相冲突的。巴利
208.Visamāhāranti tadāpavattamānasarīrāvatthāya asappāyāhāraṃ, atikaṭukaaccuṇhādivisabhāgāhāraṃ vā. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 356) pana ‘‘visabhāgāhāra’’ntveva vuttaṃ tadā pavattamānānaṃ dhātūnaṃ visabhāgattā.
209 “沐浴时”这句话,是为了说明水面上有油脂出现。呈旋转油滴散布的形状,是说油脂散开后形成旋转油滴的样子。时节不相称,是从外部生起的。界不相称,是从内部生起的。那些部位,是指手掌等部位。巴利
209.‘‘Nhānakāle’’ti idaṃ udakassa upari sinehassa sambhavadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Paribbhamantasinehabinduvisaṭasaṇṭhānāti visaṭaṃ hutvā paribbhamantasinehabindusaṇṭhānā. Utuvisabhāgo bahiddhāsamuṭṭhāno. Dhātuvisabhāgo antosamuṭṭhāno. Te padesāti te hatthatalādipadesā.
210 所谓“任何”,是指热性等味道中的某一种食物。“滋养众生的”,是指有情众生的。“心脏感到翻搅”,是指由于不相称的食物等,心脏部位发生搅动变异。巴利
210.Kiñcīti uṇhādirasānaṃ aññataraṃ āhāravatthu. Nesanti sattānaṃ. Hadayaṃ āgilāyatīti visabhāgāhārādiṃ paṭicca hadayappadeso vivattati.
211 211. 从凝乳中渗出的液体,是澄清的乳清,称为“凝乳素”。所谓“流下后”,就是流淌之后。所谓“从上颚顶端的孔洞降下后”,就是从顶端的孔洞过来,从上颚顶端降下。巴利
211. Dadhino vissandanaaccharaso dadhimuttaṃ. Gaḷitvāti sanditvā. Tālumatthakavivarena otaritvāti matthakavivarato āgantvā tālumatthakena otaritvā.
212 就像油对车轴、轮毂和轴头之间的骨节连接处起到润滑的作用。发出咔咔声:就是发出“咔、咔”的声音。这是表示拟声。痛苦:就是苦的、已经生起苦的。巴利
212. Telaṃ viya sakaṭassa nābhiakkhasīsānaṃ aṭṭhisandhīnaṃ abbhañjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā. Kaṭakaṭāyantīti ‘‘kaṭa kaṭā’’ti saddaṃ karonti. Anuravadassanaṃ hetaṃ. Dukkhantīti dukkhitāni sañjātadukkhāni honti.
213 把连根带茎的绿豆烧掉,再让灰烬过滤下来,取到的汁液就是绿豆碱。丢弃剩饭水、胎垢等东西的地方,叫作粪池。所谓“响瓶”,通常正面本来就是有口的。不过,为了说明那种连针尖那么大的进水口都没有的瓶子,才说“在无口的响瓶中”。“积聚”,就是汇集。巴利
213. Samūlakūlamāsaṃ jhāpetvā chārikaṃ avassāvetvā gahitayūso māsakhāro. Ucchiṭṭhodakagabbhamalādīnaṃ chaḍḍanaṭṭhānaṃ candanikā. Ravaṇaghaṭaṃ nāma pakatiyā sammukhameva hoti. Yassa pana āraggamattampi udakassa pavisanamukhaṃ natthi, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘amukhe ravaṇaghaṭe’’ti vuttaṃ. Āyūhananti samīhanaṃ.
214 “如是”这些词,是对前面所说的掌握取相善巧修行的总结。现在,为了把前面所说的掌握作意善巧的修行也以总结的方式收摄起来,并显示让业处达到顶点,所以开始说“从次第”等话。其中,“在超越施设的终点”,是指以超越头发等施设而进行的修行的终点。“像没有先后一样”,意思是像合为一体一样。“发”这个“iti”词是“等”的意思,或者是“方式”的意思,也就是“以这些方式”的意思。“那些法”,是指依颜色等而确定、以厌恶的样子呈现出来的部分法。巴利
214.Evañhītiādi yathāvuttāya uggahakosallapaṭipattiyā nigamanaṃ. Idāni yathāvuttaṃ manasikārakosallapaṭipattimpi nigamanavasena gahetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘anupubbato’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha paṇṇattisamatikkamāvasāneti kesādipaṇṇattisamatikkamavasena pavattāya bhāvanāya avasāne. Apubbāpariyamivāti ekajjhamiva. Kesāti iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, evamādinā iminā pakārena vāti attho. Te dhammāti vaṇṇādivasena vavatthāpitā paṭikkūlākārato upaṭṭhitā koṭṭhāsadhammā.
“于外也是”是指,在自身相续之外,也就是在他人相续的身体中。他“引摄作意”是指,将如前所说的厌恶作意提起来。“就像这个,那个也这样”意思是:当所有部分都清楚地显现时,就像在自己身体中一样,在他人身体中一切头发等部分,也以厌恶的方式清楚地呈现出来。在这里,开示了瑜伽行者一种类似于遍业处中增长的修习殊胜。巴利
Bahiddhāpīti sasantānato bahipi, parasantānakāyepīti attho. Manasikāraṃ upasaṃharatīti yathāvuttaṃ paṭikkūlamanasikāraṃ upaneti. Yathā idaṃ, tathā etanti. Evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu pākaṭībhūtesūti yathā attano kāye, evaṃ paresampi kāye sabbesu kesādikoṭṭhāsesu paṭikkūlavasena vibhūtabhāvena upaṭṭhitesūti attho. Ayamettha kasiṇesu vaḍḍhanasadiso yogino bhāvanāviseso dassito.
“次第舍离等”中的“等”字,涵盖了依经藏方式所阐明的精进平等之法。按照所说的方式,对自己身体中的头发等部分,一再地作意“厌恶、厌恶”,如此持续不断地作意时,当信等诸根获得止寂、变得清净而运转,那时,由于无信等已被远远抛开,寻等禅支便从已获殊胜力量的七种妙法中获得支持,变得更加明显、清晰地显现出来。由于这些禅支直接对治那些障碍,诸盖便连同与它们同类的恶法一起被镇伏。心以近行定而得定,他持续练习、修习、多修那个相同的相,便达到安止。因此说“次第地生起安止”。“以一切行相”是指依颜色等五种方式。“此”就是指那安止。巴利
Anupubbamuñcanādīti ādi-saddena suttantanayena vibhāvitaṃ vīriyasamatāyojanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Punappunaṃ manasi karototi vuttanayena attano kāye kesādike ‘‘paṭikkūlā paṭikkūlā’’ti abhiṇhaso manasikāraṃ pavattentassa yadā saddhādīni indriyāni laddhasamathāni visadāni pavattanti, tadā assaddhiyādīnaṃ dūrībhāvena sātisayaṃ balappattehi sattahi saddhammehi laddhūpatthambhāni vitakkādīni jhānaṅgāni paṭutarāni hutvā pātubhavanti. Tesaṃ ujuvipaccanīkatāya nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva honti saddhiṃ tadekaṭṭhehi pāpadhammehi. Upacārasamādhinā cittaṃ samādhiyati, so taṃyeva nimittaṃ āsevanto bhāvento bahulīkaronto appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anukkamena appanā uppajjatī’’ti. Sabbākāratoti vaṇṇādivasena pañcadhāpi. Sāti appanā.
如果这个业处像无识的不净业处那样,是靠初禅成就的,那为什么还叫“身至念”呢?所以论师说“如是依初禅之力”等语。在种种颜色、形状等三十二个身体部分中现起的念,在这里的作用格外殊胜,因此说“由念力而成就”。巴利
Yadi panetaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ aviññāṇakāsubhakammaṭṭhānāni viya paṭhamajjhānavasena sijjhati, atha kasmā ‘‘kāyagatāsatī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘evaṃ paṭhamajjhānavasenā’’tiādi. Nānāvaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīsu dvattiṃsāya koṭṭhāsesu pavattamānāya satiyā kiccamettha sātisayanti āha ‘‘satibalena ijjhanato’’ti.
他能忍受偏远住处和殊胜善法中的不乐,也能克服欲乐中的贪乐,所以叫“能忍不乐与乐者”,因为通过思维身体的自性,不欣喜已经被断除了。同样,由于修习身体各部分,对自己的贪爱已经灭尽,所以他能忍受怖畏恐惧,也成了能忍受寒冷等的人。因为人正是由于对自己的贪爱,才会有怖畏恐惧,也才不能忍受痛苦。然而,为了说明随顺这种身体部分修习的人,不只是得到初禅而已,还有更上的通达,所以说了“头发等”这些话。巴利
Pantasenāsanesu, adhikusalesu ca aratiṃ, kāmaguṇesu ca ratiṃ sahati abhibhavatīti aratiratisaho sarīrasabhāvacintanena anabhiratiyā pahīnattā. Tathā koṭṭhāsabhāvanāya attasinehassa parikkhīṇattā bhayabheravaṃ sahati, sītādīnañca adhivāsakajātiko hoti. Attasinehavasena hi purisassa bhayabheravaṃ hoti, dukkhassa ca anadhivāsanaṃ. Imaṃ pana koṭṭhāsabhāvanamanuyuttassa na kevalaṃ paṭhamajjhānamattameva, uttaripi paṭivedho atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘kesādīna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
入出息念论的注释巴利
Ānāpānassatikathāvaṇṇanā
215 215. “如此赞叹之后,所开示的入出息念业处”——这是连接关系。其中,因为“如何修习”等提问文的含义已经阐明,赞叹文的含义也就随之阐明了,两者没有差别,所以跳过它,直接从“如何修习”等开始。在这里,从此处起赞叹缺失,以及“此也是”这句话,是与前面不同的特殊之处。为了显示其中赞叹的存在,所以说“如此赞叹之后”。而那里的赞叹,是为了通过引发欢喜来激发精进。因为比丘们听了之后,心想:“世尊以种种方式赞叹这个定,这个定确实是寂静的、殊胜的、无杂染的、安乐的住,而且能当场让恶法消失。”于是生起欢喜,激发精进,认为应当认真地投入、付诸实践。“此也是”这个词的含义,应当通过连接关系来理解:世尊以说法的力量,将自己亲证的这个定,也让那些比丘感到亲近、现前,并以总括的方式这样说:“我所开示的、作为进入涅槃大湖之渡口的遍禅、不净禅等,并不只是那些,此也是。”巴利
215. Yaṃ taṃ evaṃ pasaṃsitvā ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ niddiṭṭhanti sambandho. Tattha yasmā ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvito’’tiādikāya pucchāpāḷiyā atthe vibhāvite thomanāpāḷiyāpi attho vibhāvitoyeva hoti bhedābhāvato, tasmā taṃ laṅghitvā ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvito cā’’tiādinā ārabhati. Tattha hi ito pasaṃsābhāvo ‘‘ayampi kho’’ti vacanañca viseso. Tesu pasaṃsābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ pasaṃsitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pasaṃsā ca tattha abhirucijananena ussāhanatthā. Tañhi sutvā bhikkhū ‘‘bhagavā imaṃ samādhiṃ anekehi ākārehi pasaṃsati, santo kirāyaṃ samādhi paṇīto ca asecanako ca sukho ca vihāro pāpadhamme ca ṭhānaso antaradhāpetī’’ti sañjātābhirucayo ussāhajātā sakkaccaṃ anuyuñjitabbaṃ paṭipajjitabbaṃ maññanti. ‘‘Ayampi kho’’ti padassa ye ime mayā nibbānamahāsarassa otaraṇatitthabhūtā kasiṇajjhānaasubhajjhānādayo desitā, na kevalaṃ te eva, ayampi khoti bhagavā attano paccakkhabhūtaṃ samādhiṃ desanānubhāvena tesampi bhikkhūnaṃ āsannaṃ, paccakkhañca karonto sampiṇḍanavasena evamāhāti sambandhamukhena attho veditabbo.
“十六事”是指:在四种观照中,按四组、每组四项来算,共有十六处。“一切行相圆满”是指:从业处巴利文的句义、总义、譬喻、问难、答复、利益等一切方面都圆满。“详说”是指:对业处毫无遗漏地广加解说。巴利
Soḷasavatthukanti catūsu anupassanāsu catunnaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena soḷasaṭṭhānaṃ. Sabbākāraparipūroti kammaṭṭhānapāḷiyā padattho piṇḍattho upamā codanā parihāro payojananti evamādīhi sabbehi ākārehi paripuṇṇo. Niddesoti kammaṭṭhānassa nissesato vitthāro.
216 “如何”这个词,是显示提问方式的表述。这里的提问,是出于想要说法的意愿,而不是别的原因。为了说明这个意思——这个提问是以涵盖上面开示中所有各类殊胜行相为所缘——所以他说“如何……是意愿问”。在“如何多作”这里,也要把“入出息念定”这个词引过来连接。其中,“如何”是想要从种种方面详细解说入出息念定之多作的意愿问。为了说明“多作的入出息念定”就是对所问之法的展示,他用“此即同理”来指代这个意思。同样,为了说明它的寂静性等也是通过那些修习多作而成就的,通过把握那多作本身就已经被包含在内了,所以说“如何多作……止息,这里也是同样的道理”。巴利
216.Kathanti idaṃ pucchanākāravibhāvanapadaṃ. Pucchā cettha kathetukamyatāvasena aññāsaṃ asambhavato. Sā ca upari desanaṃ āruḷhānaṃ sabbesaṃ pakāravisesānaṃ āmasanavasenāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘kathanti…pe… kamyatāpucchā’’ti āha. Kathaṃ bahulīkatoti etthāpi ‘‘ānāpānassatisamādhī’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tattha kathanti ānāpānassatisamādhibahulīkāraṃ nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāpucchā. Bahulīkato ānāpānassatisamādhīti tathāpuṭṭhadhammanidassananti imamatthaṃ ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti iminā atidisati. Tathā santabhāvādayopi tassa yehi bhāvanābahulīkārehi siddhā, taggahaṇeneva gahitā hontīti dassetuṃ ‘‘kathaṃ bahulīkato…pe… vūpasametīti etthāpi eseva nayo’’ti vuttaṃ.
“再者,优陀夷,我已为弟子们宣说了行道,依照此行道的弟子们修习四念处”等等(中部2.247)中,因为“令生起、令增长”的含义而称为“修习”。为了显示这两个方面,所以说“已修习,即已令生起或已令增长”。其中,“已修习”是指已令存在、已到达此种状态,也就是已令生起、仅仅获得的意思。而“已生起”是指已获得并反复练习;“已修习”是指已令达到熟练的状态,也就是已增长的意思。“执持入出息”是指以长短等差别来限定、执取入出息,即针对它们而现起的、作为念之基础的,这是意思。因为在第一种含义中,由于“相应”之说,说了定与念俱生等互为缘的关系;而在第二种含义中,也说了依止缘。因为与近行定俱行的念,是安止定的依止缘。“已多修习”是指已多次现起,以此说明已达转向等自在的状态。因为凡是已令达到自在者,由于能在所欲之时入定,所以会一再现起。因此说“一再所作”。正如“诸比丘,沙门即在此处”(中部1.139;增支部4.241)、“离诸欲”(长部1.226;相应部2.152;增支部4.123)等中,在第一句所说的“eva”一词,在第二句等中也同样说了,此处也是如此,所以说“两处都应以‘eva’一词了知限定”。为了显示由两句限定而获得的功德,说了“此中”等语。巴利
‘‘Puna ca paraṃ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṃ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāventī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.247) uppādanavaḍḍhanaṭṭhena bhāvanā vuccatīti tadubhayavasena atthaṃ dassento ‘‘bhāvitoti uppādito vaḍḍhito vā’’ti āha. Tattha bhāvaṃ vijjamānataṃ ito gatoti bhāvito, uppādito paṭiladdhamattoti attho. Uppanno pana laddhāsevano, bhāvito paguṇabhāvaṃ āpādito, vaḍḍhitoti attho . Ānāpānapariggāhikāyāti dīgharassādivisesehi saddhiṃ assāsapassāse paricchijjagāhikāya, te ārabbha pavattāya, satiyaṃ paccayabhūtāyanti attho. Purimasmiñhi atthe samādhissa satiyā sahajātādipaccayabhāvo vutto sampayuttavacanato, dutiyasmiṃ pana upanissayabhāvopi. Upacārajjhānasahagatā hi sati appanāsamādhissa upanissayo hotīti. Bahulīkatoti bahulaṃ pavattito, tena āvajjanādivasībhāvappattimāha. Yo hi vasībhāvaṃ āpādito, so icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjitabbato punappunaṃ pavattīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘punappunaṃ kato’’ti. Yathā ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241), ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.226; saṃ. ni. 2.152; a. ni. 4.123) ca evamādīsu paṭhamapade vutto eva-saddo dutiyādīsupi vutto eva hoti, evamidhāpīti āha ‘‘ubhayattha evasaddena niyamo veditabbo’’ti. Ubhayapadaniyamena laddhaguṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“不净业处”是指以不净为所缘的禅那。因为这种禅那在不净中属于瑜伽行者的修行业处,又是瑜伽行者获得殊胜之乐的原因,所以称为“不净业处”。“唯”这个字是用来排除其他所缘。“以通达”是指以禅那的通达。因为禅那依靠修习的差别而成就时,正是通达自己的境界而运作,并且按照它自身的本性被通达,所以称为“通达”。“因为所缘粗”是指所缘可厌。“因为所缘违逆”是指所缘令人厌恶。“以方便”是指以理由,或者以某种间接的方式。“因所缘寂静故”,是指所缘达到应次第观察的极微细性。因为当所缘寂静、安定时,所生起的法自身也是寂静、安定的。因此说“寂静、止息、涅槃”,意思是止息一切热恼。因所缘寂静故,应以那些以彼为所缘的法的寂静,由以出世间法为所缘的诸观察来显示。巴利
Asubhakammaṭṭhānanti asubhārammaṇajhānamāha. Taṃ hi asubhesu yogakammabhāvato, yogino sukhavisesānaṃ kāraṇabhāvato ca ‘‘asubhakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Kevala’’nti iminā ārammaṇaṃ nivatteti. Paṭivedhavasenāti jhānapaṭivedhavasena. Jhānañhi bhāvanāvisesena ijjhantaṃ attano visayaṃ paṭivijjhantameva pavattati, yathāsabhāvato paṭivijjhīyati cāti ‘‘paṭivedho’’ti vuccati. Oḷārikārammaṇattāti bībhacchārammaṇattā. Paṭikkūlārammaṇattāti jigucchitabbārammaṇattā. Pariyāyenāti kāraṇena, lesantarena vā. Ārammaṇasantatāyāti anukkamena vicetabbataṃ pattaṃ ārammaṇassa paramasukhumataṃ sandhāyāha. Sante hi sannisinne ārammaṇe pavattamāno dhammo sayampi sannisinnova hoti. Tenāha ‘‘santo vūpasanto nibbuto’’ti, nibbutasabbapariḷāhoti attho. Ārammaṇasantatāya tadārammaṇadhammānaṃ santatā lokuttaradhammārammaṇāhi paccavekkhaṇāhi dīpetabbā.
没有任何一种浇灌能带来它寂静、殊胜的状态,所以叫“无浇灌”。因为无浇灌,所以叫“未被浇灌”。“未被浇灌”是指不被上浇所浇灌。正因为未被浇灌,所以叫“不混杂、不与遍作等相混杂”。也正是因此,叫“各别、单独、唯一”。叫“不共、不共有”。所有这些说法,都是为了显示它的自性本身就是寂静的状态。或者说,遍作是寂静状态的因,而遍作指的是以生起相为终点的遍作等,这里没有这种东西,这就是要表达的意思。因为那时业处没有滋味,就可能是不寂静、不殊胜。或者说,依近行而言,这里没有寂静性,这样连接。正如在近行刹那,由舍断盖、由支的出现,他人的寂静性存在,而此者不是这样。然而,这是初……乃至……殊胜的,这样连接。所谓“某些人”,是指住在上方寺的人而说。“未被浇灌”是指不被上浇所浇灌。因此说“有滋味”,意思是像有滋味一样。“甘美”是指可爱,应知由三禅、四禅,或由舍的寂静状态而趣向乐故,能带来心乐,这一切都应当了知。然而,由禅等起殊胜色所触的身体性,应知能带来身乐,而那是在从禅出定时。在这个情况下,“在安止安止的刹那”应看作是在因上的处格。“未被遮止”是指未被禅从自己的相续中除去、未断除。“由不熟练所生”是指不熟练即无明,由此所生。因为一切恶法都以无明为先导。“以一刹那”是指以自己的生起刹那。“使消失”在这里,消失即毁灭,而那由于这里所指的是以禅为作者,所以是断除缠缚,因此说“使镇伏”。“使寂止”是指以特殊使寂止。而以特殊使寂止,正是完全使寂止,因此说“完全使寂止”。巴利
Nāssa santapaṇītabhāvāvahaṃ kiñci secananti asecanako. Asecanakattā anāsittako. Anāsittakattā eva abbokiṇṇo asammisso parikammādinā. Tato eva pāṭiyekko visuṃyeveko. Āveṇiko asādhāraṇo. Sabbametaṃ sarasato eva santabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Parikammaṃ vā santabhāvanimittaṃ, parikammanti ca kasiṇakaraṇādīni nimittuppādapariyosānaṃ, tādisaṃ idha natthīti adhippāyo. Tadā hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ nirassādattā asantamappaṇītaṃ siyā. Upacārena vā natthi ettha santatāti yojanā. Yathā upacārakkhaṇe nīvaraṇavigamena, aṅgapātubhāvena ca paresaṃ santatā hoti, na evamimassa. Ayaṃ pana ādisamannā…pe… paṇīto cāti yojanā. Kecīti uttaravihāravāsike sandhāyāha. Anāsittakoti upasecanena na āsittako. Tenāha ‘‘ojavanto’’ti, ojavantasadisoti attho. Madhūroti iṭṭho, cetasikasukhapaṭilābhasaṃvattanaṃ tikacatukkajjhānavasena, upekkhāya vā santabhāvena sukhagatikattā sabbesampi vasena veditabbaṃ. Jhānasamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭṭhasarīratāvasena pana kāyikasukhapaṭilābhasaṃvattanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tañca kho jhānato vuṭṭhitakāle. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ‘‘appitappitakkhaṇe’’ti idaṃ hetumhi bhummavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avikkhambhiteti jhānena sakasantānato anīhaṭe appahīne. Akosallasambhūteti akosallaṃ vuccati avijjā, tato sambhūte. Avijjāpubbaṅgamā hi sabbe pāpadhammā. Khaṇenevāti attano pavattikkhaṇeneva. Antaradhāpetīti ettha antaradhāpanaṃ vināsanaṃ, taṃ pana jhānakattukassa idhādhippetattā pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘vikkhambhetī’’ti. Vūpasametīti visesena upasameti. Visesena upasamanaṃ pana sammadeva upasamanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘suṭṭhu upasametī’’ti.
难道其他定就不是在它自己生起的那一刹那,就让敌对的法消失、寂止吗?那为什么唯独这个定要这样特别地提出来说呢?因为从前行阶段开始,它就有让种种寻寂止的能力。这确实说过:“应当修习入出息念,以断除寻。”再者,这是利慧者、以智为最上者的业处,而以智为最上者断除烦恼,比其他类型的人更为殊胜,就像见至者比信解者更殊胜一样。所以,针对这个差别才说“彻底地令消失、寂止”。或者,因为相显现的时候,那一刹那就有支分的显现,所以唯独这个定被称为“彻底地令消失、寂止”。就像大非时云生起、降下大雨时,那一刹那就能让地上的尘土污垢寂止一样。因此说:“诸比丘,譬如大非时云生起”等等。佛教内修行者的禅那修习,大多数都是顺决择分的,所以说“因是顺决择分”。而诸佛的则必定是顺决择分。因为修习这个业处,一切正自觉者都证得正等菩提。这个定是圣道的基础,次第增长之后,就犹如达到了圣道的状态,所以说“次第达到圣道增长”。巴利
Nanu ca aññopi samādhi attano pavattikkhaṇeneva paṭipakkhadhamme antaradhāpeti vūpasameti, atha kasmā ayameva samādhi evaṃ visesetvā vuttoti? Pubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya nānāvitakkavūpasamasabbhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘ānāpānassati bhāvetabbā vitakkupacchedāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.1; udā. 31). Apica tikkhapaññassa ñāṇuttarassetaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, ñāṇuttarassa ca kilesappahānaṃ itarehi sātisayaṃ, yathā saddhādhimuttehi diṭṭhippattassa. Tasmā imaṃ visesaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā nimittapātubhāve sati khaṇeneva aṅgapātubhāvasabbhāvato ayameva samādhi ‘‘ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametī’’ti vutto. Yathā taṃ mahato akālameghassa uṭṭhitassa dhārānipāte khaṇeneva pathaviyaṃ rajojallassa vūpasamo. Tenāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahāakālamegho uṭṭhito’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.985; pārā. 165). Sāsanikassa jhānabhāvanā yebhuyyena nibbedhabhāgiyāva hotīti āha ‘‘nibbedhabhāgiyattā’’ti. Buddhānaṃ pana ekaṃsena nibbedhabhāgiyāva hoti. Imameva hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā sabbepi sammāsambuddhā sammāsambodhiṃ adhigacchanti. Ariyamaggassa pādakabhūto ayaṃ samādhi anukkamena vaḍḍhitvā ariyamaggabhāvaṃ upagato viya hotīti āha ‘‘anupubbena ariyamaggavuddhippatto’’ti.
这个义理,按照随观离欲、灭尽、舍遣来说,才是真正契合的。为了把前面用广说方式讲过的义理收摄起来,让人容易把握,就说“这是这里的略义”,意思是总括起来的义理。巴利
Ayaṃ panattho virāganirodhapaṭinissaggānupassanānaṃ vasena sammadeva yujjati. Heṭṭhā papañcavasena vuttamatthaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho’’ti āha, piṇḍatthoti vuttaṃ hoti.
217 “Tamatthaṃ”指的是以“如何修习”等提问方式简要说的那个义理。在“在此,如来出现于世间”这类句子里,“在此”是就世间说的;在“在此处站立者”这类句子里,是指地方;在“诸比丘,我在此已吃好、吃饱、谢绝再食”这类句子里,只是用来补足句子;而在“在此,比丘学法”这类句子里,是指教法;在“诸比丘,在此有比丘”这里,也是指教法。为了说明这一点,就说“诸比丘,在此教法中有比丘”,然后为了让这个意思清楚显现,又说了“因为此……”等话。其中,“能生起一切种类入出息念定者”里的“一切种类”,是指十六种方式。因为这一切种类只存在于这个教法里。外道虽然也知道,但一开始只知道四种方式。所以说“遮止其他教法有这种情况”,意思是遮止前面所说的那种人依止其他教法。由此表明“诸比丘,在此”这句话里的“在此”是有所限定的。因为有些单个词也带有简别作用,比如“食风者”。所以又说“诸比丘,就在此,有沙门”等。因为能生起一切种类入出息念定的法,就是圆满沙门性的法。“他论”指其他外道的种种论说和教门。巴利
217.Tamatthanti taṃ ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvito’’tiādinā pucchāvasena saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ. ‘‘Idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.190; ma. ni. 1.291; a. ni. 3.61) idha-saddo lokaṃ upādāya vutto, ‘‘idheva tiṭṭhamānassā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.369) okāsaṃ, ‘‘idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.30) padapūraṇamattaṃ, ‘‘idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇātī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) pana sāsanaṃ, ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhū’’ti idhāpi sāsanamevāti dassento ‘‘bhikkhave, imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti vatvā tamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattakassāti sabbappakāraggahaṇaṃ soḷasa pakāre sandhāya. Te hi imasmiṃyeva sāsane. Bāhirakā hi jānantā ādito catuppakārameva jānanti. Tenāha ‘‘aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano’’ti, yathāvuttassa puggalassa nissayabhāvapaṭisedhanoti attho. Etena ‘‘idha bhikkhave’’ti idaṃ antogadhevasaddanti dasseti. Santi hi ekapadānipi sāvadhāraṇāni yathā ‘‘vāyubhakkho’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo’’tiādi. Paripuṇṇasamaṇakaraṇadhammo hi so, yo sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattako. Parappavādāti paresaṃ aññatitthiyānaṃ nānappakārā vādā titthāyatanāni.
为了说明阿兰若等住处正是适合修习的住所,所以说了“对此……”这一段。难以调伏、不肯顺从调御的牛,叫作恶牛。就像乳房完全不流出乳汁一样,阻碍挤奶的母牛,叫作恶乳牛。依靠色、声等而生起的乐味,就是色所缘味等。先前所惯习的所缘,是指出家之前,或者在无始轮回中反复熟习的所缘。巴利
Araññādikasseva bhāvanānurūpasenāsanataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imassa hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Duddamo damathaṃ anupagato goṇo kūṭagoṇo. Yathā thanehi sabbaso khīraṃ na paggharati, evaṃ dohapaṭibandhinī kūṭadhenu. Rūpasaddādike paṭicca uppajjanako assādo rūpārammaṇādiraso. Pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇanti pabbajjato pubbe, anādimati vā saṃsāre paricitārammaṇaṃ.
应系缚就是绑紧。以念,是指以正确生起、能善巧识别业处的念。于所缘,是指于业处所缘。坚固,就是稳固,意思是让它变得有力,就像具念的人能成就近行定和安止定那样,使它达到有力的状态。巴利
Nibandheyyāti bandheyya. Satiyāti sammadeva kammaṭṭhānasallakkhaṇasampavattāya satiyā. Ārammaṇeti kammaṭṭhānārammaṇe. Daḷhanti thiraṃ, yathā satokārissa upacārappanābhedo samādhi ijjhati, tathā thāmagataṃ katvāti attho.
作为殊胜证得和现法乐住的基础,它是一切诸佛、某些独觉佛以及佛弟子们殊胜证得的基础,也是那些通过其他业处修行而获得殊胜成就者们现法乐住的基础。巴利
Visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānanti sabbesaṃ buddhānaṃ, ekaccānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ, buddhasāvakānañca visesādhigamassa ceva aññakammaṭṭhānena adhigatavisesānaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārassa ca padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ.
世尊就像一位宅地明师,为瑜伽行者指示适合居住的地方。巴利
Vatthuvijjācariyo viya bhagavā yogīnaṃ anurūpanivāsaṭṭhānupadisanato.
比丘像豹子一样,独自住在森林里,通过摧毁对立面来达成想要的目标。所谓“最上果”,说的是沙门果。“精进力相应之地”,就是成为修习精进之速力的相应基础。巴利
Bhikkhu dīpisadiso araññe ekiko viharitvā paṭipakkhanimmathanena icchitatthasādhanato. Phalamuttamanti sāmaññaphalamāha. Parakkamajavayoggabhūminti bhāvanussāhajavassa yoggakaraṇabhūmibhūtaṃ.
218 “对于如此所说的相”:指在阿毗达摩论法门和经教法门中所说的那些相。“树近处”:就是像这样说的树的附近位置——“正午时分,树荫向四周遍满,无风时叶子落下,到这个范围就称为树下”。“其余七种住处”:就是像这样说的山、岩窟、山洞、坟场、林野、露地、草堆。巴利
218.Evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇesūti abhidhammapariyāyena (vibha. 530), suttantapariyāyena ca vuttalakkhaṇesu. Rukkhasamīpanti ‘‘yāvatā majjhanhike kāle samantā chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni patanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūlanti vuccatī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ rukkhassa samīpaṭṭhānaṃ. Avasesasattavidhasenāsananti pabbataṃ kandaraṃ giriguhaṃ susānaṃ vanapatthaṃ abbhokāsaṃ palālapuñjanti evaṃ vuttaṃ.
随顺三季与随顺界、行:就是随顺热季等三季,随顺痰界等三界,以及随顺痴行等三行。就像这样,热季时林野合适,冬季时树下合适,雨季时空寂之处合适;对痰界、痰性的人来说林野合适,对胆汁界的人来说树下合适,对风界的人来说空寂之处合适;对痴行的人来说林野合适,对嗔行的人来说树下合适,对贪行的人来说空寂之处合适。不属萎靡、不掉举这一边:就是不属萎靡与散乱这一边。因为躺卧属于懈怠这一边,站立和行走属于掉举这一边,而坐着不是这样。因此它才是平静的。为了显示坐姿的稳固来自结跏趺坐,呼吸运行的舒适来自上身保持正直,把握所缘的方法来自把念安放在面前,所以这样说。缚膝坐:就是依膝下绑缚而坐。下身的非正直安放,仅凭“坐”这个词就已经表明了,所以“身正直”中的“身”字是指上身,因此说“把上身正直安放”。为了从自相和作用两方面说明这种正直安放,所以说了“十八”等。不俯:就是不低垂。不散堕:就是不离散、不越出道路,正因为如此,前后相续地获得殊胜,达到增长、增广。这里前缀pari与前缀abhi意义相同,所以说“面向业处”,意思是遮止外在的种种所缘,只以业处为前导。pari是摄持的意思,就像“pariṇāyikā”(能导者)等词中那样。出离的意思是从敌对法出离。所以“已摄持出离”的意思是:以一切方式确立不忘失、已舍离忘失的念,安立最上的念与慧。巴利
Ututtayānukūlaṃ dhātucariyānukūlanti gimhādiututtayassa, semhādidhātuttayassa, mohādicariyattayassa ca anukūlaṃ. Tathā hi gimhakāle ca araññaṃ anukūlaṃ, hemante rukkhamūlaṃ, vassakāle suññāgāraṃ, semhadhātukassa semhapakatikassa araññaṃ, pittadhātukassa rukkhamūlaṃ , vātadhātukassa suññāgāraṃ anukūlaṃ, mohacaritassa araññaṃ, dosacaritassa rukkhamūlaṃ, rāgacaritassa suññāgāraṃ anukūlaṃ. Alīnānuddhaccapakkhikanti asaṅkocāvikkhepapakkhikaṃ. Sayanañhi kosajjapakkhikaṃ, ṭhānacaṅkamanāni uddhaccapakkhikāni, na evaṃ nisajjā. Tato evassa santatā. Nisajjāya daḷhabhāvaṃ pallaṅkābhujanena, assāsapassāsānaṃ pavattanasukhataṃ uparimakāyassa ujukaṭṭhapanena, ārammaṇapariggahūpāyaṃ parimukhaṃ satiyā ṭhapanena dassento. Ūrubaddhāsananti ūrūnamadhobandhanavasena nisajjā. Heṭṭhimakāyassa anujukaṃ ṭhapanaṃ nisajjā-vacaneneva bodhitanti ‘‘ujuṃ kāya’’nti ettha kāya-saddo uparimakāyavisayoti āha ‘‘uparimasarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Taṃ pana ujukaṭṭhapanaṃ sarūpato, payojanato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhārasā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na paṇamantīti na onamanti. Na paripatatīti na vigacchati vīthiṃ na vilaṅghati, tato eva pubbenāparaṃ visesuppattiyā vuddhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati. Idha pari-saddo abhi-saddena samānatthoti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti, bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇato nivāretvā kammaṭṭhānaṃyeva purakkhitvāti attho. Parīti pariggahaṭṭho ‘‘pariṇāyikā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 16) viya. Niyyānaṭṭho paṭipakkhato niggamanaṭṭho. Tasmā pariggahitaniyyānanti sabbathā gahitāsammosaṃ pariccattasammosaṃ satiṃ katvā, paramaṃ satinepakkaṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti attho.
219 “具念者”的意思是:具足正念、正在忆念而入息,他的入息活动丝毫没有脱离正念。“具念者出息”这里,也应当把eva一词引来而说成“具念者出息”。“念行者”指成为具念者,或以正念而作应作之事者,或具造作习性者。如果“具念者入息,具念者出息”已在其分别中说明,那为什么不说“入息出息”,而说“念行者”呢?这是为了使说法一味。因为在第一个四分组中,仅有两词依现在时出现,其余则依未来时。因此,为了使说法一味,于一切处都说为“念行者”。巴利
219.Satovāti satiyā samannāgato eva saranto eva assasati nāssa kāci sativirahitā assāsappavatti hotīti attho. Sato passasatīti etthāpi satova passasatīti eva-saddo ānetvā vattabbo. Satokārīti sato eva hutvā, satiyā eva vā kātabbassa kattā, karaṇasīlo vā. Yadi ‘‘satova assasati sato passasatī’’ti etassa vibhaṅge (ma. ni. 3.148; saṃ. ni. 5.986; pārā. 165) vuttaṃ, atha kasmā ‘‘assasati passasati’’cceva avatvā ‘‘satokārī’’ti vuttaṃ? Ekarasaṃ desanaṃ kātukāmatāya. Paṭhamacatukke padadvayameva hi vattamānakālavasena āgataṃ, itarāni anāgatakālavasena. Tasmā ekarasaṃ desanaṃ kātukāmatāya sabbattha (paṭi. ma. 1.165 ādayo) ‘‘satokāri’’cceva vuttaṃ.
“以长入息”这个说法,是省略了语尾变化,直接用“长入息”来解说。或者也可以理解为:依世尊所说的“长”而入息。“了知心的一境性、不散乱”:因为它是散乱的对立面,所以得到“不散乱”这个名字,也就是了知心的独一境界。“念已现前”:指念已经靠近所缘并安住下来。“以彼念、以彼智”:指以前面所说的念,以及前面所说的智。这里要表达的是:对于以长入息为所缘而心不散乱的人,或者以不迷惑而了知的人,念就已经现前;对于正知彼者,以作所缘的方式、或以不迷惑的方式而有正知;以依于彼的念与正知,具足彼的瑜伽行者,就叫做“念行者”。“以随观舍遣而入息”:指成为随观舍遣者而入息。或者读作“随观舍遣之入息”,意思是:那随观舍遣者的入息就是随观舍遣之入息,依这些而入息。按律藏的讲法,向内生起的呼吸是入息,向外生起的呼吸是出息。但按经藏的讲法,即使向外生起后仍属于内的呼吸也是入息,即使向内生起后仍属于外的呼吸也是出息。这个道理就是——巴利
Dīghaṃassāsavasenāti dīghaassāsavasena vibhattialopaṃ katvā niddeso. Dīghanti vā bhagavatā vuttaassāsavasena. Cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepanti vikkhepassa paṭipakkhabhāvato ‘‘avikkhepo’’ti laddhanāmacittassa ekaggabhāvaṃ pajānato. Sati upaṭṭhitā hotīti ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇenāti yathāvuttāya satiyā, yathāvuttena ca ñāṇena. Idaṃ vutta hoti – dīghaṃ assāsaṃ ārammaṇabhūtaṃ avikkhittacittassa, asammohato vā pajānantassa tattha sati upaṭṭhitā eva hoti, taṃ sampajānantassa ārammaṇakaraṇavasena, asammohavasena vā sampajaññaṃ, tadadhīnasatisampajaññena taṃsamaṅgī yogāvacaro satokārī nāma hotīti. Paṭinissaggānupassī assāsavasenāti paṭinissaggānupassī hutvā assasanassa vasena. ‘‘Paṭinissaggānupassīassāsavasenā’’ti vā pāṭho. Tassa paṭinissaggānupassino assāsā paṭinissaggānupassīassāsā, tesaṃ vasenāti attho. Vinayanayena anto uṭṭhitasasanaṃ assāso, bahi uṭṭhitasasanaṃ passāso. Suttantanayena pana bahi uṭṭhahitvāpi anto sasanato assāso, anto uṭṭhahitvāpi bahi sasanato passāso. Ayameva ca nayo –
以正念跟随入息的开始、中间和结束阶段时,如果心向内散乱,那么身体和心都会变得躁动、动摇、颤动。以正念跟随出息的开始、中间和结束阶段时,如果心向外散乱,那么身体和心都会变得躁动、动摇、颤动。巴利
‘‘Assāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato ajjhattaṃ vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā cā’’ti, ‘‘passāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato bahiddhā vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā cā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.157) –
与此巴利经文相符。巴利
Imāya pāḷiyā sameti.
他们说:内风先向外出去,所以按生起的次第,入息被先说。“触及上颚而息灭”就是触及上颚而停止。据说正因为这样,刚出生的婴儿会打喷嚏。“如是乃至”等句,是对前面所说内容的总结。有些人说:“‘如是乃至’这里,意思是应当理解为:按这种生起的次第,入息就是向外出去的风。”巴利
Paṭhamaṃ abbhantaravāto bahi nikkhamati, tasmā pavattikkamena assāso paṭhamaṃ vuttoti vadanti. Tāluṃ āhacca nibbāyatīti tāluṃ āhacca nirujjhati. Tena kira sampatijāto bāladārako khipitaṃ karoti. Evaṃ tāvātiādi yathāvuttassa atthassa nigamanaṃ. Keci ‘‘evaṃ tāvāti anena pavattikkamena assāso bahinikkhamanavātoti gahetabbanti adhippāyo’’ti vadanti.
“依长时”是指依时间上的长时。这个“长时”一词,既能指时间,也能指处所。在这里,先以处所长时作为例子来说明,然后再依时间上的长时,为了阐明入出息的长短,所以说了“正如”等话。其中,“处所长时”是指作为处所的长时。“遍满”就是周遍。“粉碎”是指因为许多聚团而变得粉碎。“长时”就是长的处所。因此,由于缓慢地生起而有长的相续,所以称为“长”。这里应当知道,在象等身体和狗等身体中,入出息的长短是依时间上的长时来说的,而不是依处所长时的差别来说的。因为经中说:“缓慢地充满后,缓慢地逸出”,“迅速地充满后,迅速地逸出”。“于人中”是指在同样大小的人身中。“长入息”是指长入息的相续在生起;出息在这里也是同样的道理。像狗、兔等那样,入息和出息都短,就这样相续。这些长和短的入出息,应当看作那些众生的身体本性。“他们”是指众生。“它们”是指入出息。“短时”是指很短的时间。巴利
Addhānavasenāti kāladdhānavasena. Ayaṃ hi addhāna-saddo kālassa, desassa ca vācako. Tattha desaddhānaṃ udāharaṇabhāvena dassetvā kāladdhānavasena assāsapassāsānaṃ dīgharassataṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha okāsaddhānanti okāsabhūtaṃ addhānaṃ. Pharitvāti byāpetvā. Cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi anekakalāpabhāvena. Dīghaṃ addhānanti dīghaṃ padesaṃ. Tasmāti saṇikaṃ pavattiyā dīghasantānatāya ‘‘dīghā’’ti vuccanti. Ettha ca hatthiādisarīre, sunakhādisarīre ca assāsapassāsānaṃ desaddhānavisiṭṭhena kāladdhānavaseneva dīgharassatā vuttāti veditabbā. ‘‘Saṇikaṃ pūretvā saṇikameva nikkhamanti’’, ‘‘sīghaṃ pūretvā sīghameva nikkhamantī’’ti ca vacanato. Manussesūti samānappamāṇesupi manussasarīresu. Dīghaṃ assasantīti dīghaṃ assāsappabandhaṃ pavattentīti attho. Passasantīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sunakhasasādayo viya rassaṃ assasanti ca passasanti cāti yojanā. Idaṃ pana dīghaṃ, rassañca assasanaṃ, passasanañca tesaṃ sattānaṃ sarīrasabhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tesanti sattānaṃ. Teti assāsapassāsā. Ittaramaddhānanti appakaṃ kālaṃ.
“以九种行相”是说:对精勤修习的人,在入息出息前后还没有获得殊胜进展时,最初只按时间长短所说的三种行相,而这三者又是就三类人来说的:有些人能清楚地观照入息,有些人能清楚地观照出息,有些人则两者都能。不过也有人主张:“‘入息、出息’合在一起说,是为了显示修习不间断地持续。”按欲愿来说,如前有这三种;同样,按喜悦来说也有三种。这样合计就是九种行相。巴利
Navahākārehīti bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa pubbenāparaṃ aladdhavisesassa kevalaṃ addhānavasena ādito vuttā tayo ākārā, te ca kho ekacco assāsaṃ suṭṭhu sallakkheti, ekacco passāsaṃ, ekacco tadubhayanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena. Keci pana ‘‘assasatipi passasatipīti ekajjhaṃ vacanaṃ bhāvanāya nirantaraṃ pavattidassanattha’’nti vadanti. Chandavasena pubbe viya tayo, tathā pāmojjavasenāti imehi navahākārehi.
在这里,虽然对某一个人来说只可能得到三种行相,但按照传承,一切行相都已收入圣典,而且应当依照这些行相来修遍作,所以说“于此,那位比丘以九种行相”。“如此了知”是指:以如上所说的行相了知入息和出息,在那里持续作意。“以一种行相”是指在长入息等四种行相中的一种行相,或者在九种、三种中的一种。因为接下来将会说:巴利
Kāmaṃ cettha ekassa puggalassa tayo eva ākārā labbhanti, tantivasena pana sabbesaṃ pāḷiāruḷhattā, tesaṃ vasena parikammassa kātabbattā ca ‘‘tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu navahākārehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pajānatoti evaṃ yathāvuttehi ākārehi assāsapassāse pajānato, tattha manasikāraṃ pavattentassa. Ekenākārenāti dīghaṃ assāsādīsu catūsu ākāresu ekena ākārena, navasu tīsu vā ekena. Tathā hi vakkhati –
入息有长有短,出息也同样如此;
比丘的鼻端,现起四种色。巴利
‘‘Dīgho rasso ca assāso, passāsopi ca tādiso; Cattāro vaṇṇā vattanti, nāsikagge va bhikkhuno’’ti.
这个修习就是入出息身随观,因此说“身随观念处的修习得以成就”。巴利
Ayaṃ bhāvanā assāsapassāsakāyānupassanāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā sampajjatī’’ti.
现在,为了完全按照巴利原典的方式,说明那九种行相以及修习的方法,所以开始了“如所说”等这一段。其中,“如何了知?”是为了要说明“了知的方法”而发问。“长入息”是指前面说过的具有那种特征的长的入息。“称为长时”是指在被称为“长时”的长时间里,也就是“长刹那”的意思。或者,“称为”这个词就像在“称为偷盗”等地方那样,是“部分、类别”的同义词,所以“称为长时”就是“长时间的部分”,也就是“地区的部分”的意思。“欲生起”是说:由于修习能带来前后阶段的殊胜,在那里获得了滋味,于是就生起了以“特别想要去做”为特征的善的欲。“以欲之力”是说:以这样生起的欲之力,对于特别精勤地修习、使业处不断增长广大的人来说。“从此更微细”是说:比前面那种欲生起的状态更微细。因为依靠修习的力量,身体的躁动和热恼得以止息,身体的入出息就变得更微细而持续生起。“喜悦生起”是说:由于入出息变得更微细,所缘变得更加寂静,而且业处也进入了正确的行道,所以与修习之心相应的、分为小喜等种类的柔软之喜就生起了。“心回转”是说:有人认为,由于入出息逐渐变得极其微细而不再显现,当达到应当被分别的状态时,心就回转退开。然而,依靠修习的力量,当入出息变得更为微细时,在那里生起了似相,心就从平常的入出息上回转。“舍安住”是说:在那个似相上,当近行定和安止定这两种定生起之后,为了再次生起禅那已经不需要再费力运作,所以只是旁观。而应当知道,这个舍就是“平等舍”。巴利
Idāni pāḷivaseneva te nava ākāre, bhāvanāvidhiñca dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kathaṃ pajānātīti pajānanavidhiṃ kathetukamyatāya pucchati. Dīghaṃ assāsanti vuttalakkhaṇaṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ. Addhānasaṅkhāteti ‘‘addhāna’’nti saṅkhaṃ gate dīghe kāle, dīghaṃ khaṇanti attho. Koṭṭhāsapariyāyo vā saṅkhāta-saddo ‘‘theyyasaṅkhāta’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 91) viya, tasmā addhānasaṅkhāteti addhānakoṭṭhāse, desabhāgeti attho. Chando uppajjatīti bhāvanāya pubbenāparaṃ visesaṃ āvahantiyā laddhassādattā tattha sātisayo kattukāmatālakkhaṇo kusalacchando uppajjati. Chandavasenāti tathāpavattachandassa vasena savisesaṃ bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuddhiṃ phātiṃ gamentassa. Tato sukhumataranti yathāvuttachandappavattiyā purimato sukhumataraṃ. Bhāvanābalena hi paṭippassaddhadarathapariḷāhatāya kāyassa assāsapassāsā sukhumatarā hutvā pavattanti. Pāmojjaṃ uppajjatīti assāsapassāsānaṃ sukhumatarabhāvena ārammaṇassa santataratāya, kammaṭṭhānassa ca vīthipaṭipannatāya bhāvanācittasahagato pamodo khuddikādibhedā taruṇapīti uppajjati. Cittaṃ vivattatīti anukkamena assāsapassāsānaṃ ativiya sukhumatarabhāvappattiyā anupaṭṭhahane vicetabbākārappattehi cittaṃ vinivattatīti keci. Bhāvanābalena pana sukhumatarabhāvappattesu assāsapassāsesu tattha paṭibhāganimitte uppanne pakatiassāsapassāsato cittaṃ nivattati. Upekkhā saṇṭhātīti tasmiṃ paṭibhāganimitte upacārappanābhede samādhimhi uppanne puna jhānanibbattanatthaṃ byāpārābhāvato ajjhupekkhanaṃ hotīti. Sā panāyaṃ upekkhā tatramajjhattupekkhāti veditabbā.
“以这九种行相”是指以刚才所说的这九种方式生起。“长入出息身”是指具有长形态的入出息,即使细碎分散,也依集合之义而称为“身”。这里,依入出息而生起的似相,也随入出息本身而称为入出息。“念的现起”是指念到达所缘并安住,所以叫现起。“随观智”是指:以止的方式随观似相;以观的方式,把入出息以及依它而生的身确定为“色”,把心以及与心相应的法确定为“非色”,这样对名色进行随观的智,就是对它的如实了知。“身是现起处”是说:那个身作为所缘,念到达那里并安住,所以叫现起处。这里用“身是现起处”这句话,也把其他身包括进来了,因为这里也想要包含刚才所说的遍作行。“不是念”是说:那个身不叫念。念既是现起处,也是念,具有忆念之义和安住之义。“以那念”是指以刚才所说的念。“以那智”是指以刚才所说的智。“那个身”是指那入出息身以及依它而生的色身。“随观”是指以与禅那相应的智和以观智一再地观察。因此就说这是“于身修习身随观念处”——以这种随观,对刚才所说的身,这就称为身随观念处的修习。巴利
Imehi navahi ākārehīti imehi yathāvuttehi navahi pakārehi pavattā. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā kāyoti dīghākārā assāsapassāsā cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi samūhaṭṭhena kāyo. Assāsapassāse nissāya uppannanimittampettha assāsapassāsasamaññameva vuttaṃ. Upaṭṭhānaṃ satīti ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā tiṭṭhatīti sati upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Anupassanāñāṇanti samathavasena nimittassa anupassanā, vipassanāvasena assāsapassāse, tannissayañca kāyaṃ ‘‘rūpa’’nti, cittaṃ taṃsampayuttadhamme ca ‘‘arūpa’’nti vavatthapetvā nāmarūpassa anupassanā ca ñāṇaṃ, tattha yathābhūtāvabodho. Kāyo upaṭṭhānanti so kāyo ārammaṇakaraṇavasena upagantvā sati ettha tiṭṭhatīti upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Ettha ca ‘‘kāyo upaṭṭhāna’’nti iminā itarakāyassāpi saṅgaho hoti yathāvuttasammasanacārassāpi idha icchitattā. No satīti so kāyo sati nāma na hoti. Sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca saraṇaṭṭhena, upatiṭṭhanaṭṭhena ca. Tāya satiyāti yathāvuttāya satiyā. Tena ñāṇenāti yathāvutteneva ñāṇena. Taṃ kāyanti taṃ assāsapassāsakāyañceva tannissayarūpakāyañca. Anupassatīti jhānasampayuttañāṇena ceva vipassanāñāṇena ca anu anu passati. Tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti tena anupassanena yathāvutte kāye ayaṃ kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti vuccati.
这里说的是:对于上面所说的入出息身,以及作为它依托的业生身,只是对身本身进行随观,就像把没有水的阳焰看成水一样,并不是对具有无常等性质的身去随观为常等,而是按照实际情况,只随观无常、苦、无我、不净这些性质。或者说,因为身中根本没有任何东西可以执取为“我”“我的”“女人”“男人”,所以不那样去随观,而只是对身本身进行随观,这就是身随观。与那身随观相应的念,就是现起安住之处,也就是念处。对它进行修习、增长,就是身随观念处的修习。巴利
Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā ayaṃ yathāvutte assāsapassāsakāye, tassa nissayabhūte karajakāye ca kāyasseva anupassanā anudakabhūtāya marīciyā udakānupassanā viya na aniccādisabhāve kāye niccādibhāvānupassanā, atha kho yathārahaṃ aniccadukkhānattāsubhabhāvassevānupassanā. Atha vā kāye ‘‘aha’’nti vā ‘‘mama’’nti vā ‘‘itthī’’ti vā ‘‘puriso’’ti vā gahetabbassa kassaci abhāvato tādisaṃ ananupassitvā kāyamattasseva anupassanā kāyānupassanā, tāya kāyānupassanāya sampayuttā satiyeva upaṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, tassa bhāvanā vaḍḍhanā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti.
这个“理趣”是指:把“以九种行相”等所说的规则,类推到短息这一段上。“在此”是指在如上所示的“如何长入息”等所传承的巴利教法中。“于此”则是指在以短息这一段传承的巴利教法中。巴利
Esa nayoti ‘‘navahi ākārehī’’tiādinā vuttavidhiṃ rassa-pade atidisati. Etthāti etasmiṃ yathādassite ‘‘kathaṃ dīghaṃ assasanto’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.148; saṃ. ni. 5.986; pārā. 165) āgate pāḷinaye. Idhāti imasmiṃ rassapadavasena āgate pāḷinaye.
此即是瑜伽行者。以长时间来说,就是依长时间。以短时间来说,就是依短暂的时间。以这些方式,就是依这九种方式。巴利
Ayanti yogāvacaro. Addhānavasenāti dīghakālavasena. Ittaravasenāti parittakālavasena. Imehi ākārehīti imehi navahi ākārehi.
所谓“那样的”,就是指长的和短的。“四种颜色”是指四种形态,它们也就是长等(的形态)。至于“在鼻端,比丘如是”这一说法,是为了偈颂在组合上顺口,才把“在鼻端”说成“在鼻端或”,“或”这个词表示不确定,因此把上唇也包括进来了。巴利
Tādisoti dīgho, rasso ca. Cattāro vaṇṇāti cattāro ākārā, te ca dīghādayo eva. Nāsikagge va bhikkhunoti gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ rassaṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘nāsikagge vā’’ti, vā-saddo aniyamattho, tena uttaroṭṭhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
220 “全身觉知者”:是指对全身的每一个部分都逐一地、如实地感受、了知;或者,他对每一个部分都逐一地、如实地有感受,或者他正逐一地、如实地觉知那个全身,这就是这句话的意思。在这里,虽然用“一切”这个词已经完整地涵盖了入息等所依的整个身体,没有遗漏,但由于身体是许多色聚的集合体,为了显示对它的所有部分都能觉知,所以又取了“paṭi(逐一、各个)”这个词。在这里,为了显示恭敬认真行持的状态,又取了“saṃ(正确地、完全地)”这个词。为了说明这个意思,才说了“整个的”等话。在这里应当知道:就像在入出息中,为了显示修行者在修习方式上,即使入出息是相同的,也应当对每一个都逐一地、认真地去修,所以作了分别的教导;同样地,为了阐明这个意思,虽然意义相同,也用“整个的”等话对这两个词分别作了义释。令明显,就是令它清楚显现,彻底地明了的意思。在那里,令明显、明了,就是不再迷惑,这是通过以智令它们(入出息)运转而成就的。为了显示这个意思,才说了“如此令了知”等话。在那里,“因此”:因为是以与智相应的心令入出息运转,而不是以与智不相应的心,所以,这样的“全身觉知者”,被称为“我当觉知全身而入息,我当觉知全身而出息,如此修学”,这是佛陀等所说的,应当这样连接理解。碎、细碎、散:由于是许多色聚的状态,以碎、细碎的方式而散布。开始变得明显:由于念与智的力量,以及先前如此造作努力的运转。应成为那样的:应当成为与第四种人相似的状态,意思是:更不用说,在令念与智现前之后,于三处都应当令与智相应的心运转起来。巴利
220.Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedīti sabbassa kāyassa paṭi paṭi paccekaṃ sammadeva vedanasīlo jānanasīlo, tassa vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedo etassa atthi, taṃ vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedamānoti attho. Tattha tattha sabba-ggahaṇena assāsādikāyassa anavasesapariyādāne siddhepi anekakalāpasamudāyabhāvato tassa sabbesampi bhāgānaṃ saṃvedanadassanatthaṃ paṭi-saddaggahaṇaṃ. Tattha sakkaccakārībhāvadassanatthaṃ saṃ-saddaggahaṇanti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sakalassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yathā samānepi assāsapassāsesu yogino paṭipattividhāne paccekaṃ sakkaccaṃyeva paṭipajjitabbanti dassetuṃ visuṃ desanā katā, evaṃ tamevatthaṃ dīpetuṃ satipi atthassa samānatāya ‘‘sakalassā’’tiādinā padadvayassa visuṃ visuṃ atthavaṇṇanā katāti veditabbaṃ. Pākaṭaṃ karontoti vibhūtaṃ karonto, sabbaso vibhāventoti attho. Pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ vibhāvanaṃ tattha asammuyhanaṃ ñāṇeneva nesaṃ pavattanena hotīti dassento ‘‘evaṃ viditaṃ karonto’’tiādimāha. Tattha tasmāti yasmā ñāṇasampayuttacitteneva assāsapassāse pavatteti, na vippayuttacittena, tasmā evaṃbhūto sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatīti vuccati buddhādīhīti yojanā. Cuṇṇavicuṇṇavisaṭeti anekakalāpatāya cuṇṇavicuṇṇabhāvena visaṭe. Ādi pākaṭo hoti satiyā, ñāṇassa ca vasena tathā pubbābhisaṅkhārassa pavattattā. Tādisena bhavitabbanti catutthapuggalasadisena bhavitabbaṃ, pageva satiṃ, ñāṇañca paccupaṭṭhapetvā tīsupi ṭhānesu ñāṇasampayuttameva cittaṃ pavattetabbanti adhippāyo.
“如此”是指以刚才所说的方式,也就是依全身而觉知。“努力”就是精勤。“策励”就是发起精进,让作意运转起来,这是它的意思。“这样的”是指那位正在修习入出息念的人。“防护”是指念,或者也可以指精进。“以那念”是指依于入出息而生起的那份念,以那份念。“以那作意”是指在那里以念为先导的修习作意,与它相应,这是要表达的意思。“修习”是指在说到“三学”时,对增上善法的修习。在这里,那修习就被称为“学”。巴利
Evanti vuttappakārena sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedanavaseneva. Ghaṭatīti ussahati. Vāyamatīti vāyāmaṃ karoti, manasikāraṃ pavattetīti attho. Tathābhūtassāti ānāpānassatiṃ bhāventassa. Saṃvaroti sati , vīriyampi vā. Tāya satiyāti yā ānāpāne ārabbha pavattā sati, tāya. Tena manasikārenāti yo so tattha satipubbaṅgamo bhāvanāmanasikāro, tena saddhinti adhippāyo. Āsevatīti ‘‘tisso sikkhāyo’’ti vutte adhikusaladhamme āsevati. Tadāsevanañhettha sikkhananti adhippetaṃ.
“前一种方法”是指前面那种修行方法,也就是最初那两个所缘。在那里,虽然由于如实了知入出息长短的状态,确实能生起智,但那并不难,因为只是按照它们生起的样子去把握而已,所以那里用了现在时的表达。可是后面这种方法就很难,像人走在刀刃上一样。因此,为了说明在这里应当有更殊胜的预先努力,就用了未来时的表达。为了显示这个意思,才说了“在那里,因为……”等话。其中,“生起智等”里的“等”字,包含了身行轻安、觉知喜等。不过有些人在这里说:“这是指包含防护和受持。”巴利
Purimanayeti purimasmiṃ bhāvanānaye, paṭhamavatthudvayeti adhippāyo. Tatthāpi kāmaṃ ñāṇuppādanaṃ labbhateva assāsapassāsānaṃ yāthāvato dīgharassabhāvāvabodhasabbhāvato, tathāpi taṃ na dukkaraṃ yathāpavattānaṃ tesaṃ gahaṇamattabhāvatoti tattha vattamānakālappayogo kato. Idaṃ pana dukkaraṃ purisassa khuradhārāyaṃ gamanasadisaṃ, tasmā sātisayenettha pubbābhisaṅkhārena bhavitabbanti dīpetuṃ anāgatakālappayogo katoti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ñāṇuppādanādīsūti ādi-saddena kāyasaṅkhārapassambhanapītipaṭisaṃvedanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Keci panettha ‘‘saṃvarasamādānānaṃ saṅgaho’’ti vadanti.
所谓“身行”,就是入息和出息。它虽然是心所生的,但因为依附于业生身而活动,所以被那业生身所造作,因此称为身行。不过,像“身行、语行”这样提到的、以思为特征的身行,虽然也能在别的门中生起,但因为它主要、经常通过身门活动,所以被如此标示,这里指的不是那个。在“令轻安”等说法中,后一个词是前一个词的同义解释,所以轻安就是止息。应当知道,如果没有那样努力,本来会生起的粗的身行,就因为努力圆满而不再生起。那里,就是指“令粗的身行轻安”这句话里。未摄持时,就是业处还没有开始修的时候,也因此是身和心都还没有被摄持的时候。因为“结跏趺坐,把身体端正挺直,把念安放在面前”这句话里,“端正身体”说的是摄持身,“把念安放在面前”说的是摄持心。所以论中说:“身和心都被摄持了。”身,就是业生身。有不安,就是有热恼。而它们的不安状态,和粗重性一样,与粗的状态分不开,因此说“粗的”。更强,就是更有力、更粗大。成为寂静,就是心首先因为没有向外散乱而成为一境,摄持业处而运转,变得寂静、止息;正因如此,由它生起的色法达到轻、柔软、适合运作的状态;由于与此相应,其余的三相续色也如此。这样,当心和身都止息而运转时,依止于它们的入息和出息,其寂静的性质就次第变得更细、更微细而运转。因此说:“然而,当他的身也……”等等。巴利
Kāyasaṅkhāranti assāsapassāsaṃ. So hi cittasamuṭṭhānopi samāno karajakāyappaṭibaddhavuttitāya tena saṅkharīyatīti kāyasaṅkhāroti vuccati. Yo pana ‘‘kāyasaṅkhāro vacīsaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.102) evamāgato kāyasaṅkhāro cetanālakkhaṇo satipi dvārantaruppattiyaṃ yebhuyyavuttiyā, tabbahulavuttiyā ca kāyadvārena lakkhito, so idha nādhippeto. Passambhentotiādīsu pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ padaṃ purimassa purimassa atthavacanaṃ, tasmā passambhanaṃ nāma vūpasamanaṃ, tañca tathāpayoge asati uppajjanārahassa oḷārikassa kāyasaṅkhārassa payogasampattiyā anuppādananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tatrāti ‘‘oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento’’ti ettha. Apariggahitakāleti kammaṭṭhānassa anāraddhakāle, tato eva kāyacittānampi apariggahitakāle. ‘‘Nisīdati pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyā’’ti hi iminā kāyapariggaho, ‘‘parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti iminā cittapariggaho vutto. Tenevāha ‘‘kāyopi cittampi pariggahitā hontī’’ti. Kāyoti karajakāyo. Sadarathāti sapariḷāhā, sā ca nesaṃ sadarathatā garubhāvena viya oḷārikatāya avinābhāvinīti āha ‘‘oḷārikā’’ti. Balavatarāti sabalā thūlā. Santā hontīti cittaṃ tāvaṃ bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvena ekaggaṃ hutvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā pavattamānaṃ santaṃ hoti vūpasantaṃ, tato eva taṃsamuṭṭhānā rūpadhammā lahumudukammaññabhāvappattā, tadanuguṇatāya sesaṃ tisantatirūpanti evaṃ citte, kāye ca vūpasante pavattamāne tannissitā assāsapassāsā santasabhāvā anukkamena sukhumatarasukhumatamā hutvā pavattanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yadā panassa kāyopī’’tiādi.
把心转向“我要让它平息下来”,这是第一次转向。正确地、一次又一次地把所缘提起来、持住,这是等持,也就是在同一个所缘上接连不断地反复转向。对同一个所缘作意,把它放在心里,这是作意。审察、反复观察,这是观察。巴利
Ābhujanaṃ ābhogo, ‘‘passambhemī’’ti paṭhamāvajjanā. Sammā anu anu āharaṇaṃ samannāhāro, tasmiṃyeva atthe aparāparaṃ pavattaāvajjanā. Tasseva atthassa manasi karaṇaṃ citte ṭhapanaṃ manasikāro. Vīmaṃsā paccavekkhaṇā.
有热恼的,就是有躁动、有燃烧的。增上的,就是有力的、粗的。这是以语法性别的颠倒来说的。因为这里实际所指的,是身行。或者说,这是对动作的修饰语,意思是“以增上的状态而转起”。微细的,在这里也是同样的道理。于身这里,应把“于心”以及引进来连接。巴利
Sāraddheti sadarathe sapariḷāhe. Adhimattanti balavaṃ oḷārikaṃ. Liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ. Kāyasaṅkhāroti hi adhippeto. ‘‘Adhimattaṃ hutvā pavattatī’’ti kiriyāvisesanaṃ vā etaṃ. Sukhumanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Kāyamhīti ettha ‘‘citte cā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
221 从初禅出定之后,为了进入第二禅而进行的各种转向和遍作,就像初禅那样,因为远遣了敌对法,所以由它产生的身行,在初禅和第二禅的近行中被说为粗重,这是就相似而言。这个道理也适用于其余两种近行。或者,对于为了证得第二禅等而修行的人,因为苦行道等而疲惫的瑜伽行者,由于身体疲劳、心受损害等,以及由于寻等扰动而使心现起动摇,在第二禅等的近行中,应当知道身行是粗重的。极微细,是指在别处能够获得的身行,在第四禅中超越了微细。在那里,它连微细性都没有,何况粗重性?因为它已不转起。因此说达到了完全不转起。巴利
221. Paṭhamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya kariyamānaṃ dutiyajjhānassa nānāvajjanaṃ parikammaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ viya dūrasamussāritapaṭipakkhanti katvā taṃsamuṭṭhāno kāyasaṅkhāro paṭhamajjhāne ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre ca oḷārikoti sadiso vutto. Esa nayo sesūpacāradvayepi. Atha vā dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamāya paṭipajjato dukkhāpaṭipadādivasena kilamato yogino kāyakilamathacittūpaghātādivasena, vitakkādisaṅkhobhena ca sapariphandatāya cittappavattiyā dutiyajjhānādiupacāresu kāyasaṅkhārassa oḷārikatā veditabbā. Atisukhumoti aññattha labbhamāno kāyasaṅkhāro catutthajjhāne atikkantasukhumo. Sukhumabhāvopissa tattha natthi, kuto oḷārikatā appavattanato. Tenāha ‘‘appavattimeva pāpuṇātī’’ti.
中部诵者认为,当获得禅那的人具念时,在次第入定的时刻,或者就在同一座中证得一切禅那时,从下下禅那到上上禅那的近行,身行都越来越微细。因为在那种情况下,有近行的诸禅那越往上越具有殊胜性和寂静性,这是可以成立的;或者,这是就同一种转向的近行而说的。这样一来,由于所缘境不同,这个说法就和前面所说的主张并不矛盾。“一切”指的是这两种情况。因为他们全都按照所说的方式希求轻安。“未执取时生起的身行,在执取时止息”,这是就相续相似而说的。因为那些粗重的入出息等并不会本身变成微细,但它们止息的方式正如前面所说。巴利
Lābhissa sato anupubbasamāpattisamāpajjanavelaṃ, ekāsaneneva vā sabbesaṃ jhānānaṃ paṭilābhaṃ sandhāya majjhimabhāṇakā heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānato uparūparijhānūpacārepi sukhumataraṃ icchanti. Tattha hi sopacārānaṃ jhānānaṃ uparūpari visesavantatā, santatā ca sambhaveyya, ekāvajjanūpacāraṃ vā sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Evañhi heṭṭhā vuttavādena imassa vādassa avirodho siddho bhinnavisayattā. Sabbesaññevāti ubhayesampi. Yasmā te sabbepi vuccamānena vidhinā passaddhimicchantiyeva. ‘‘Apariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro pariggahitakāle paṭippassambhatī’’ti idaṃ sadisasantānatāya vuttaṃ. Na hi te eva oḷārikā assāsādayo sukhumā honti. Passambhanākāro pana nesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
在把握四大时说到“微细”,这是针对通过四界门而专注于观来说的。在把握一切色时说到“微细”,是因为修习越来越向上、越来越殊胜。因此他说:“在把握色与非色时微细。”“以相为所缘的观”,说的是对色聚的思惟。从厌随观开始,是强观的阶段;在那之前,是弱观的阶段。“依前文所说之理”,意思是:依照“未把握时”等语句在止的理趣中所说的方式,在观的理趣中也应当配合止息来说,也就是“未把握时生起的身行,在把握四大时止息”等等。巴利
Mahābhūtapariggahe sukhumoti catudhātumukhena vipassanābhinivesaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sakalarūpapariggahe sukhumo bhāvanāya uparūpari paṇītabhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘rūpārūpapariggahe sukhumo’’ti. Lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāti kalāpasammasanamāha. Nibbidānupassanato paṭṭhāya balavavipassanā. Tato oraṃ dubbalavipassanā. Pubbe vuttanayenāti ‘‘apariggahitakāle’’tiādinā samathanaye vuttena nayena ‘‘apariggahe pavatto kāyasaṅkhāro mahābhūtapariggahe paṭippassambhatī’’tiādinā vipassanānayepi paṭippassaddhi yojetabbāti vuttaṃ hoti.
Assāti 是对“passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ”这一句的解释。以诘问与澄清,是指通过追问与辩明。如此,是指现在正要说明的方式。巴利
Assāti imassa ‘‘passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti padassa. Codanāsodhanāhīti anuyogaparihārehi. Evanti idāni vuccamānākārena.
“如何”这个问题,是针对《无碍解道》里说的“止息……学习”那段话而问的:身行的止息和修行者的学习,到底是怎么进行的、以什么方式进行的?为了从身行本身的样相、粗重与微细、寂止,以及修习和退失这几个方面来说明,所以接着开始讲“什么是身行”等内容。其中,“属于身的”是指存在于色身当中的;“系属于身的”是指依止于身的。身存在时它们才存在,身不存在时它们就不存在,因此,它们虽然不是从身产生的,却是由身造作的,所以叫身行。“止息”是指让粗重的身行平息下来。后面两个词是它的同义词。因为,让那粗重、尚未寂静的身行沉静下来,叫“止息”;让它达到不再生起的灭去状态,叫“灭”;把它善巧地引向寂静的状态,叫“寂止”。巴利
Kathanti yaṃ idaṃ ‘‘passambhayaṃ…pe… sikkhatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.171) vuttaṃ, taṃ kathaṃ kena pakārena kāyasaṅkhārassa passambhanaṃ, yogino ca sikkhanaṃ hotīti kathetukamyatāya pucchitvā kāyasaṅkhāre sarūpato, oḷārikasukhumato, vūpasamato, anuyogaparihārato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘katame kāyasaṅkhārā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kāyikāti rūpakāye bhavā. Kāyapaṭibaddhāti kāyasannissitā. Kāye sati honti, asati na honti, tato eva te akāyasamuṭṭhānāpi kāyena saṅkharīyantīti kāyasaṅkhārā. Passambhentoti oḷārikoḷārikaṃ passambhento. Sesapadadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Oḷārikañhi kāyasaṅkhāraṃ avūpasantasabhāvaṃ sannisīdāpento ‘‘passambhento’’ti vuccati, anuppādanirodhaṃ pāpento ‘‘nirodhento’’ti, suṭṭhu santasabhāvaṃ nayanto ‘‘vūpasamento’’ti.
“如那样的”就是指像那样的。“以身行”就是指粗重的身行。“前屈”是指身体朝向前方的弯曲。“侧屈”是指看向不同方向时的弯曲。“全屈”是指向各个方向的弯曲,或者说是很好地、全面地弯曲。“后屈”是指向背后的弯曲。“动”等词是“前屈”等词的同义词;或者说,强烈的、朝向正面的移动等叫“前屈”等,微弱的叫“动”等。“止息身行”是指止息作为这类前屈等动作之因的粗重身行。因为当那粗重身行被止息时,前屈等动作也就随之被止息了。巴利
Yathārūpehīti yādisehi. Kāyasaṅkhārehīti oḷārikehi kāyasaṅkhārehi. Ānamanāti abhimukhabhāvena kāyassa namanā. Vinamanāti visuṃ visuṃ passato namanā. Sannamanāti sabbato, suṭṭhu vā namanā. Paṇamanāti pacchato namanā. Iñjanādīni ānamanādīnaṃ vevacanāni, adhimattāni vā abhimukhaṃ calanādīni ānamanādayo, mandāni iñjanādayo. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti tathārūpaṃ ānamanādīnaṃ kāraṇabhūtaṃ oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento. Tasmiṃ hi passambhite ānamanādayopi passambhitā eva honti.
寂静、微细:对于那种样子的身行——也就是那些让身体不再有动摇的因——不存在前屈等动作,因为这类身行没有不安,所以称为寂静;因为不粗重,所以称为微细。止息身行这句话,是把这两种状态合起来一起说的。或者说,先前逐步止息粗重的身行,接着逐步生起那些作为身体不再动摇之因的微细、更微细的身行,然后再把这些也止息掉,最终达到极微细的顶点而止息的身行——针对这个,才说止息寂静、微细的身行。巴利
Santaṃ sukhumanti yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi kāyassa aparipphandanahetūhi ānamanādayo na honti, tathārūpaṃ darathābhāvato santaṃ, anoḷārikatāya sukhumaṃ. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti sāmaññato ekaṃ katvā vadati. Atha vā pubbe oḷārikoḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambhento anukkamena kāyassa aparipphandanahetubhūte sukhumasukhumatare uppādetvā tepi paṭippassambhetvā paramasukhumatāya koṭippattaṃ yaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambheti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘santaṃ sukhumaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti.
“Iti”等是质难者的话。其中,“iti”是表示方式的质词。“kira”表示不满,意思是“竟然如此”。这里要表达的意思是:如果按所说的方式,连极微细的身行也能令它止息。“evaṃ sante”意思是“如果这样的话,按你所说的道理能够成立时”。“vātūpaladdhiyā”意思是“获得风”。而“ca”是并列的意思:以入出息等风为所缘的心,它的产生、生起、运转都不会发生,而且那些入出息等也应当由此而止息。“Assāsapassāsānañca bhāvanā”意思是:粗重的入出息通过修习止息之后,微细的入出息也不会产生,因为两者都应当由此而止息。“Ānāpānassatiyā”意思是:以入出息为所缘的念也不会运转,因为入出息已不存在。正因如此,与它相应的入出息念定也不会产生、生起。因为有所缘的法,任何时候都不可能没有所缘而存在。“Na ca naṃ taṃ”这里的“naṃ”只是质词。整句的连接是:智者、有智慧的人既不进入所说的那种等至,也不从其中出起。质难者就是以“一切都不存在,导向止息”这样的意图来提出质难的。巴利
Itītiādi codakavacanaṃ. Tattha itīti pakāratthe nipāto. Kirāti arucisūcane, evaṃ ceti attho. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – vuttappakārena yadi atisukhumampi kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhetīti. Evaṃ santeti evaṃ sati tayā vuttākāre labbhamāne. Vātūpaladdhiyāti vātassa upaladdhiyā. Ca-saddo samuccayattho, assāsādivātārammaṇassa cittassa pabhāvanā uppādanā pavattanā na hoti, te ca tena passambhetabbāti adhippāyo. Assāsapassāsānañca bhāvanāti oḷārike assāsapassāse bhāvanāya paṭippassambhetvā sukhumānaṃ tesaṃ pabhāvanā ca na hoti, ubhayesaṃ tesaṃ tena paṭippassambhetabbato. Ānāpānassatiyāti ānāpānārammaṇāya satiyā ca pavattanaṃ na hoti, ānāpānānaṃ abhāvato. Tato eva taṃsampayuttassa ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā uppādanāpi na hoti. Na hi kadāci ārammaṇena vinā sārammaṇadhammā sambhavanti. Na ca naṃ tanti ettha nanti nipātamattaṃ . Taṃ vuttavidhānaṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā paññavanto na ceva samāpajjantipi tato na vuṭṭhahantipīti yojanā. Evaṃ codako sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvūpanayanaṃ passambhananti adhippāyena codeti.
再者,“iti kira”等这些话,是对前面所说的质难作出的回答。其中,“kira”这个词是表示“yadi”(如果)这个意思的虚词。“iti kira sikkhati”的意思是:如果按照我所说的方式去修学。“evaṃ sante”的意思是:当这样止息的时候。“pabhāvanā hoti”要表达的意思是:虽然粗重的身行已经止息,但微细的身行仍然存在;随着逐渐达到极其微细的状态,由于相的生起,入出息念和入出息念定确实能够被修成、得以成就。巴利
Puna iti kirātiādi yathāvuttāya codanāya vissajjanā. Tattha kirāti ‘‘yadī’’ti etassa atthe nipāto. Iti kira sikkhati, mayā vuttākārena yadi sikkhatīti attho. Evaṃ santeti evaṃ passambhane sati. Pabhāvanā hotīti yadipi oḷārikā kāyasaṅkhārā paṭippassambhanti, sukhumā pana atthevāti anukkamena paramasukhumabhāvappattassa vasena nimittuppattiyā ānāpānassatiyā, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā ijjhatevāti adhippāyo.
“yathā kathaṃ viyā”这句话的意思是:应当按照前面所说的方式来看待它,就像那样。这里想问的是:在说明这个道理时,有没有什么譬喻可用?现在为了显示譬喻,就说出了“seyyathāpī”等话。其中,“seyyathāpī”是一个表示譬喻含义的虚词。“kaṃse”指在铜器里。“nimittaṃ”是“nimittassa”的意思,也就是那些声音生起的方式;这里用的是宾格形式,但表达的是属格的意义。“suggahitattā”意思是因善巧地执取;“sumanasikatattā”意思是因善巧地安立于心中;“sūpadhāritattā”意思是因正确地观察、善标记。“Sukhumakā saddāti”是对细微的声音说的,即那些微小的声音。这个“ka”字义为小。“Sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇatāpīti”是说,细微的声音本身就是相,即细微声音相,也就是以它为所缘。这里说的是什么意思呢?纵然那时连细微的声音也已灭去,但由于声音相被善巧地执取,心仍然以更细微的声音相为所缘而继续生起。因为从最初开始,当人以不散乱的心观察那那已灭去的声音的相时,到最后,即使是以极细微的声音相为所缘,心也仍然继续生起。心不会进入散乱,因为在那个如其所现的相上,具有等持的状态。巴利
Yathā kathaṃ viyāti yathāvuttavidhānaṃ taṃ kathaṃ viya daṭṭhabbaṃ, atthi kiñci tadatthasampaṭipādane opammanti adhippāyo. Idāni opammaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha seyyathāpīti opammatthe nipāto. Kaṃseti kaṃsabhājane. Nimittanti nimittassa, tesaṃ saddānaṃ pavattākārassāti attho. Sāmiatthe hi idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Suggahitattāti suṭṭhu gahitattā. Sumanasikatattāti suṭṭhu citte ṭhapitattā. Sūpadhāritattāti sammadeva upadhāritattā sallakkhitattā. Sukhumakā saddāti anurave āha, ye appakā. Appattho hi ayaṃ ka-saddo. Sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇatāpīti sukhumo saddova nimittaṃ sukhumasaddanimittaṃ, tadārammaṇatāyapi. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Kāmaṃ tadāsukhumāpi saddā niruddhā, saddanimittassa pana suggahitattā sukhumatarasaddanimittārammaṇabhāvenāpi cittaṃ pavattati. Ādito paṭṭhāya hi tassa tassa niruddhassa saddassa nimittaṃ avikkhittena cittena upadhārentassa anukkamena pariyosāne atisukhumasaddanimittampi ārammaṇaṃ katvā cittaṃ pavattateva. Cittaṃ na vikkhepaṃ gacchati tasmiṃ yathāupaṭṭhite nimitte samādhānasabbhāvato.
“evaṃ sante”等语,是为了总结前面所说的义理而说的。其中,为了把那句结合了质难与简别而解明其义的经文拈出来,并分别显示身随观念处等,才说了“passambhayaṃ”等。这一切因为前面已经讲明了理趣,所以浅显易懂。巴利
Evaṃ santetiādi vuttassevatthassa nigamanavasena vuttaṃ. Tattha yassa suttapadassa saddhiṃ codanāsodhanāhi attho vutto, taṃ uddharitvā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānāni vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘passambhaya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ vuttanayattā uttānameva.
222 222. “以初学者业处的方式”这句话,是就止业处而说的。至于观业处,在其余四法组中也同样可以得到。“于此”指第一组。“五节”就是五个部分,意思是五个分段。巴利
222.Ādikammikassakammaṭṭhānavasenāti samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vipassanaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pana itaracatukkesupi labbhateva. Etthāti paṭhamacatukke. Pañcasandhikanti pañcapabbaṃ, pañcabhāganti attho.
学习业处,就是学习业处的典籍。针对这个义理的提问,就是对业处义理的询问。或者换个说法,从文本和义理两方面学习业处,这叫“学习”。其中,对疑惑的提问,就叫“询问”。业处的现起,是指相的现起,也就是这样精勤修习的人在心里确认“相在这里是这样现起的”;同样,业处的安止就是“这样进入禅那”。业处的特相,是指通过计数、随逐、接触来策励修习之后,安止的成就,或者更进一步,通过观察等方式达到顶点,也就是对业处自性的观察。因此说“意思就是对业处自性的审察”。巴利
Kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhananti kammaṭṭhānaganthassa uggaṇhanaṃ. Tadatthaparipucchā kammaṭṭhānassa paripucchanā. Atha vā ganthato, atthato ca kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanaṃ uggaho. Tattha saṃsayaparipucchanā paripucchā. Kammaṭṭhānassa upaṭṭhānanti nimittupaṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa ‘‘evamidha nimittaṃ upaṭṭhātī’’ti upadhāraṇaṃ, tathā kammaṭṭhānappanā ‘‘evaṃ jhānamappetī’’ti. Kammaṭṭhānassa lakkhaṇanti gaṇanānubandhanāphusanānaṃ vasena bhāvanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ṭhapanāya sampatti, tato parampi vā sallakkhaṇādivasena matthakappattīti kammaṭṭhānasabhāvassa sallakkhaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasabhāvūpadhāraṇanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
自己也不会疲惫,因为只是分部分地学习业处。正因为这样,也不会烦扰导师,因为能把法和相关事项修到究竟。所以,那个相就是自己不疲惫、不烦扰导师的原因。少许,就是一点一点。应当学习,所以叫学习,这是指整个业处的修法,不只是前面说的那种学习而已。从导师那里学习,就是从导师处学习,由此而来。甚至一个词,也就是一个部分。巴利
Attanāpi na kilamati odhiso kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanato. Tato eva ācariyampi na viheseti dhammādhikaraṇampi bhāvanāya matthakaṃ pāpanato. Tasmāti taṃ nimittaṃ attano akilamanaācariyāvihesanahetu. Thokanti thokaṃ thokaṃ. Uggahetabbato uggaho, sabbopi kammaṭṭhānavidhi, na pubbe vuttauggahamattaṃ. Ācariyato uggaho ācariyuggaho, tato. Ekapadampīti ekakoṭṭhāsampi.
223 随行:就是正念以跟随入出息的方式,不间断地持续运作。触:当人计数入出息时,收摄计数之后,以正念跟随它们,并像安止生起时那样把心安放在那里,这时心在鼻端等部位对它们的接触,就是触。不过,因为并不像计数等那样,另外还有一种以触为方式的单独作意,而是应当在每一个所触之处就进行计数等,为了说明这一点,这里在解释“触”这个词时说“触就是所触之处”。安立:就是等持。因为心正确地安住于所缘,这就是安立。正如“心的安住、善住”所说的那样,定就是这样被说明的。而安止以定为主,所以说“安立就是安止”。随观:就是观,因为能觉察无常等。从转起以及从相上回转,所以名为回转,这就是道。由于一切杂染完全止息,所以是彻底的清净,这就是果。这两者就是回转与遍净。对观:就是反复地看、反复地观察,因此说“省察”。巴利
223.Anuvahanāti assāsapassāsānaṃ anugamanavasena satiyā nirantaraṃ anupavattanā. Phusanāti assāsapassāse gaṇentassa gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhantassa yathā appanā hoti, tathā cittaṃ ṭhapentassa ca nāsikaggādiṭṭhānassa nesaṃ phusanā. Yasmā pana gaṇanādivasena viya phusanāvasena visuṃ manasikāro natthi, phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva gaṇanādi kātabbanti dassetuṃ idha phusanāgahaṇanti dīpento ‘‘phusanāti phuṭṭhaṭṭhāna’’nti āha. Ṭhapanāti samādhānaṃ. Taṃ hi sammadeva ārammaṇe cittassa ādhānaṃ ṭhapanaṃ hoti. Tathā hi samādhi ‘‘cittassa ṭhiti saṇṭhitī’’ti (dha. sa. 11.15) niddiṭṭho. Samādhippadhānā pana appanāti āha ‘‘ṭhapanāti appanā’’ti. Aniccatādīnaṃ sallakkhaṇato sallakkhaṇā vipassanā. Pavattato, nimittato ca vinivaṭṭanato vivaṭṭanā nāma maggo. Sakalasaṃkilesapaṭippassaddhibhāvato sabbaso suddhīti pārisuddhi phalaṃ. Tesanti vivaṭṭanāpārisuddhīnaṃ. Paṭipassanāti paṭi paṭi dassanaṃ pekkhanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paccavekkhaṇā’’ti.
分断:就是以“一、三、五”这样的方式来计数,把它分段。于场合:这是针对计数方法而说的。只是依靠计数,并不是依靠业处。“是否已经达到顶点?”这句话,是针对长时间把心放在计数上的人而说的。因为他可能只是依靠这样得到的不散乱,就生起这样的想法。“在入出息中,取那现起的”:这是针对在入出息中,只有一个先现起的人而说的;如果两个都现起,就应该把两个都取来计数。又应当知道,“那现起的”这句话也显示了另一层意思:在两个鼻孔的风中,哪一个更明显地现起,就应该取那一个。正在转起、正在转起:通过重复这个词,显示对入出息没有间断地觉察。如是:就是依照前面所说的方式觉察之后。它们变得明显:因为以计数的方式,向外散乱不存在的缘故。巴利
Khaṇḍanti ekaṃ tīṇi pañcāti evaṃ gaṇanāya khaṇḍanaṃ. Okāseti gaṇanavidhiṃ sandhāyāha. Gaṇananissitova na kammaṭṭhānanissito. ‘‘Sikhāppattaṃ nu kho’’ti idaṃ cirataraṃ gaṇanāya manasi karontassa vasena vuttaṃ. So hi tathā laddhaṃ avikkhepamattaṃ nissāya evaṃ maññeyya . ‘‘Assāsapassāsesu yo upaṭṭhāti, taṃ gahetvā’’ti idaṃ assāsapassāsesu yassa ekova paṭhamaṃ upaṭṭhāti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, yassa pana ubhopi upaṭṭhahanti, tena ubhayampi gahetvā gaṇetabbaṃ. ‘‘Yo upaṭṭhātī’’ti iminā ca dvīsu nāsāpuṭavātesu yo pākaṭataro upaṭṭhāti, so gahetabboti ayampi attho dīpitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pavattamānaṃ pavattamānanti āmeḍitavacanena nirantaraṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Evanti vuttappakārena upalakkhetvā vāti attho. Pākaṭā honti gaṇanāvasena bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvato.
门闩的转动,他们把门闩放在哪里,那里就是门闩柱。“整夜”这个词,是在表达持续不断的关系时用的业格。“依前法”是指快速计数,也就是牧牛人的计数方式。一、二、三、四、五,这是在展示计数的方法。因此在“八”等数字上,也应该从“一”开始,逐一数到“八”等。要快快地数。为什么?下文用“因为系属于计数”等话,说明了其中的理由和例子。其中,船靠它被推动,所以叫“桨”,就是划船的杆。用桨来支撑,叫“桨的支撑”,是就这个意义说的。巴利
Palighassa parivattanaṃ, taṃ yattha nikkhipanti, so palighatthambho. Tiyāmarattinti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Purimanayenāti sīghagaṇanāya, gopālakagaṇanāyāti attho. Eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañcāti gaṇanāvidhidassanaṃ. Tasmā aṭṭhātiādīsupi ekato paṭṭhāyeva paccekaṃ aṭṭhādīni pāpetabbāni. Sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇetabbameva. Kasmāti tattha kāraṇaṃ, nidassanañca dasseti ‘‘gaṇanapaṭibaddhe hī’’tiādinā. Tattha arīyati tena nāvāti arittaṃ, pājanadaṇḍo. Arittena upatthambhanaṃ arittupatthambhanaṃ, tassa vasena.
从究竟意义上说,所谓“无间断地转起”,其实唯在安立之中,所以论中说“犹如无间断转起一般”。作意进入体内的风,就叫作把心引入内部。把心引到外部时,道理也一样。被风冲击:对多作意体内风的人来说,那个部位就好像被风冲击了一样,又好像充满了脂肪一样,这样显现出来。引出时:指放开所触之处;然而这样引出时,心以寻察风的走向为门径,便驰散于种种所缘,所以说“心于种种所缘散乱”。巴利
Nippariyāyato nirantarappavatti nāma ṭhapanāyamevāti āha ‘‘nirantaraṃ pavattaṃ viyā’’ti. Anto pavisantaṃ vātaṃ manasi karonto anto cittaṃ paveseti nāma. Bahi cittanīharaṇepi eseva nayo. Vātabbhāhatanti abbhantaragataṃ vātaṃ bahulaṃ manasi karontassa vātena taṃ ṭhānaṃ abbhāhataṃ viya, medena pūritaṃ viya ca hoti, tathā upaṭṭhāti. Nīharato phuṭṭhokāsaṃ muñcitvā, tathā pana nīharato vātassa gatisamannesanamukhena nānārammaṇesu cittaṃ vidhāvatīti āha ‘‘puthuttārammaṇe cittaṃ vikkhipatī’’ti.
所谓“此”,就是指这由入出息所生的东西。巴利
Etanti etaṃ assāsapassāsajātaṃ.
224 随行:对不断生起的入息和出息,以它们为所缘,让念一次又一次地跟随、随顺地运转,这就是随行。因此他说:“而那并不是以初、中、后随行的方式。”脐是起点,因为入出息最先在这里生起。这里是以最初生起来说“始”,并不是说只要生起就算“始”。因为实际上,它们从脐开始一直到鼻端,到处都在生起。而且它们在哪里生起,就在那里坏灭,因为诸法并没有移动。然而随着因缘在别处生起,就假名为“行”。心脏是中间:也就是心脏附近,以它的上半部分为中间。鼻端是终点:也就是鼻尖是它的终点,因为入出息的假名以此为界限。因为据说它们是“心等起的”,而心等起之物不可能存在于外界。因此他说:“进入内部的风,以鼻端为始。”不过应当知道,出入的次第是就相似性来说的。已趣散乱:就是已经进入散乱,意思是散乱、不定。有热恼:就是具有烦扰的状态。有动摇:就是业处作意的动摇。巴利
224.Anugamananti pavattapavattānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena satiyā anu anu pavattanaṃ anugacchanaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘tañca kho na ādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasenā’’ti. Nābhi ādi tattha paṭhamaṃ uppajjanato. Paṭhamuppattivasena hi idha ādicintā, na uppattimattavasena. Tathā hi te nābhito paṭṭhāya yāva nāsikaggā sabbattha uppajjanteva. Yattha yattha ca uppajjanti, tattha tattheva bhijjanti dhammānaṃ gamanābhāvato. Yathāpaccayaṃ pana desantaruppattiyaṃ gatisamaññā. Hadayaṃ majjhanti hadayasamīpaṃ tassa uparibhāgo majjhaṃ. Nāsikaggaṃ pariyosānanti nāsikaṭṭhānaṃ tassa pariyosānaṃ assāsapassāsasamaññāya tadavadhibhāvato. Tathā hete ‘‘cittasamuṭṭhānā’’ti vuttā, na ca bahiddhā cittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ sambhavo atthi. Tenāha ‘‘abbhantaraṃ pavisanavātassa nāsikaggaṃ ādī’’ti. Pavisananikkhamanapariyāyo pana taṃsadisavasena vuttoti veditabbo. Vikkhepagatanti vikkhepaṃ upagataṃ, vikkhittaṃ asamāhitanti attho. Sāraddhāyāti sadarathabhāvāya. Iñjanāyāti kammaṭṭhānamanasikārassa calanāya.
以散乱的心:这里的具格表示原因,或者表示状态特征。有热恼:就是带有烦扰。有动摇:就是动摇、动转。同样,有颤动。巴利
Vikkhepagatena cittenāti hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe vā. Sāraddhāti sadarathā. Iñjitāti iñjanakā calanakā. Tathā phanditā.
所谓“依初、中、后”,意思是:不应以追随初、中、后的方式来作意——这就是这句话的关联。为了阐明“随顺地作意时,应当依触和依安住来作意”这个意图,所以说了“就像依计数和随顺的方式”等等。其中,并没有单独的作意:也就是说,如果没有计数和随顺,那么仅仅依触、依安住的业处作意就不可能依次第存在。难道不是没有触就没有安住,没有触就连计数的作意也不存在吗?虽然没有,但计数作为业处作意的根本,应当以首要的地位来把握;同样,随顺对于安住也是如此,因为没有随顺,安住就不可能。因此,即使触并非没有间隔,但为了显示应以计数和随顺为根本、为首要来把握,而另外两者离开了它们就不存在,所以说“就像依计数和随顺的方式,并没有单独的依触和安住作意”。如果这样的话,那为什么在总说中又单独列出它们呢?于是说“就在触到的每一个地方”等等。其中,“就在触到的每一个地方计数”这句话,表明触是计数的组成部分。因此说“依计数和触而作意”。“就在那里”:就是在触到的每一个地方。“它们”:指入出息。“以念随行”:就是跟随计数的过程,以念系缚,意思是在触到的那个地方无间断地观照它们。“以安止安立心”:就是使心安立于所现起的相上,如同安止生起那样,令心专注。在“以随顺”等句中,应当连接为:以随顺、以触、以安住而作意。这个意思就是:前面所说的“就在触到的每一个地方计数,就在那里把计数收摄回来,以念随行它们”,这就是这个意思。那不以极端来衡量、不加以决断的,就接近慢,好比“牛像公牛一样”的比喻。巴利
Ādimajjhapariyosānavasenāti ādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasena na manasi kātabbanti sambandho. ‘‘Anubandhanāya manasi karontena phusanāvasena ca ṭhapanāvasena ca manasi kātabba’’nti yenādhippāyena vuttaṃ, taṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha visuṃ manasikāro natthīti gaṇanāya, anubandhanāya ca vinā yathākkamaṃ kevalaṃ phusanāvasena, ṭhapanāvasena ca kammaṭṭhānamanasikāro natthi. Nanu phusanāya vinā ṭhapanāya viya, phusanāya vinā gaṇanāyapi manasikāro natthiyeva? Yadipi natthi, gaṇanā pana yathā kammaṭṭhānamanasikārassa mūlabhāvato padhānabhāvena gahetabbā, evaṃ anubandhanā ṭhapanāya, tāya vinā ṭhapanāya asambhavato. Tasmā satipi phusanāya nānantarikabhāve gaṇanānubandhanā eva mūlabhāvato padhānabhāvena gahetvā itarāsaṃ tadabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viya hi phusanāṭhapanāvasena visuṃ manasikāro natthī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ tā kasmā uddese visuṃ gahitāti āha ‘‘phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyevā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva gaṇento’’ti iminā gaṇanāya phusanā aṅganti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘gaṇanāya ca phusanāya ca manasi karotī’’ti. Tatthevāti phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva. Teti assāsapassāse. Satiyā anubandhantoti gaṇanāvīthiṃ anugantvā satiyā nibandhanto, phuṭṭhokāseyeva te nirantaraṃ upadhārentoti attho. Appanāvasena cittaṃ ṭhapentoti yathā appanā hoti, evaṃ yathāupaṭṭhite nimitte cittaṃ ṭhapento samādahanto. Anubandhanāya cātiādīsu anubandhanāya ca phusanāya ca ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotīti vuccatīti yojanā. Svāyamatthoti yvāyaṃ ‘‘phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva gaṇento, tattheva gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhanto’’ti ca vutto, so ayamattho. Yā accantāya na minoti na vinicchināti, sā mānassa samīpeti upamā yathā ‘‘goṇo viya gavayo’’ti.
225 “跛脚的人”就是指坐在垫子上的人。“秋千”就是摇篮。“玩耍”是指正在玩耍的人们的动作。“母亲和儿子”是指自己的妻子和儿子。“两端”是指来的人那一端和去的人那一端,也就是前后两头。“中间”是指秋千板的正中间。“就像绑缚的柱子一样”:绑缚的柱子,就是鼻尖或者口相,站在它的底下、靠近它的地方。怎么站呢?靠念的力量来站。因为修行的人把念稳稳地安放在那里时,就可以说他“站在那里”,这是用局部的名称来指代整体。“于相”:就是在鼻尖等相上。“以念而坐”:就是靠着念而坐。“因为念在那里”等等,也应该像“站立”那段一样来解释。“在那里”:就是在每一个被触碰到的地方。巴利
225.Paṅguḷoti pīṭhasappī. Dolā pekholo. Kīḷatanti kīḷantānaṃ. Mātāputtānanti attano bhariyāya, puttassa ca. Ubho koṭiyoti āgacchantassa purimakoṭiṃ, gacchantassa pacchimakoṭinti dvepi koṭiyo. Majjhanti dolāphalakasseva majjhaṃ. Upanibandhanathambho viyāti upanibandhanathambho, nāsikaggaṃ, mukhanimittaṃ vā, tassa mūle samīpe ṭhatvā. Kathaṃ ṭhatvā? Satiyā vasena. Satiñhi tattha sūpaṭṭhitaṃ karonto yogāvacaro tattha ṭhito nāma hoti, avayavadhammena samudāyassa apadisitabbato. Nimitteti nāsikaggādinimitte. Satiyā nisīdantoti sativasena nisīdanto. ‘‘Satiñhi tatthā’’tiādinā ṭhāne viya vattabbaṃ. Tatthāti phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāne.
226 “他们”指城里和城外的人,以及他们的随从和手里拿的东西。巴利
226.Teti nagarassa antobahigatā manussā, tesaṃ saṅgahā ca hatthagatā.
227 “从最初开始”是指从显示所比喻之义的起点开始。偈颂里的“相”,是指作为系缚依据的相。“并非单一心的所缘”,是说它不是单一心的所缘,也就是不成为所缘的意思。“而不知三法者”,是指对相、入息、出息这三法,不能以将其作为所缘的方式来修持的人。“ca”这个字表示区别。“修习”是指入出息念的定修习。“不可得”是指得不到、不成就。这是问难偈的意思,而第二首答难偈则很容易理解。巴利
227.Ādito paṭṭhāyāti upameyyatthadassanato paṭṭhāya. Gāthāyaṃ nimittanti upanibandhanānimittaṃ. Anārammaṇamekacittassāti ekassa cittassa na ārammaṇaṃ, ārammaṇaṃ na hontīti attho. Ajānato ca tayo dhammeti nimittaṃ assāso passāsoti ime tayo dhamme ārammaṇakaraṇavasena avindantassa. Ca-saddo byatireke. Bhāvanāti ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanā. Nupalabbhatīti na upalabbhati na sijjhatīti ayaṃ codanāgāthāya attho, dutiyā pana parihāragāthā suviññeyyāva.
“如何”是为了阐明这些义理而发起的、想要宣说的提问。在“此三法”等句子中,连同句子的搭配,这是义理的解释:这相、入息、出息三法,怎么就不是单一心的所缘呢?然而这三法并非不被了知,怎么又不是不被了知呢?因为如果不了知它们,心怎么会不散乱?令修习成就的精进、即主要的勤,怎么显现?能镇伏诸盖、正确带来等持的、称为修习随行的用功,瑜伽行者怎么成就?又怎么一步步证得世间与出世间的殊胜?巴利
Kathanti tāsaṃ atthaṃ vivarituṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā. Ime tayo dhammātiādīsu padayojanāya saddhiṃ ayamatthaniddeso – ime nimittādayo tayo dhammā ekacittassa kathaṃ ārammaṇaṃ na honti, tathāpi na cime na ca ime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, kathaṃ na ca honti aviditā? Tesañhi aviditatte cittañca kathaṃ vikkhepaṃ na gacchati, padhānañca bhāvanāya nipphādakaṃ vīriyañca kathaṃ paññāyati, nīvaraṇānaṃ vikkhambhakaṃ sammadeva samādhānāvahaṃ bhāvanānuyogasaṅkhātaṃ payogañca yogī kathaṃ sādheti, uparūpari lokiyalokuttarañca visesaṃ kathamadhigacchatīti.
现在,为了用锯子的比喻来说明这个道理,就说了“譬如”等话。如果地面高低不平,在摇动的树上,锯树的工作就不容易做好;而且那样的话,锯齿来去的走向也难以辨认,所以他说“在平坦的地面上”。“用锯”是指用小而齿利的锯。因此他说“人”。“所触的锯齿”,是就每一处被触碰到的锯齿来说的。这就表明,那人只在锯齿触碰到的那些地方,靠念让它们现前。因此他说“他对来或去的锯齿不作意”。拉锯的时候,朝向人这边转来的,叫“来”;推锯的时候,从那里离开的,叫“去”。而来或去的锯齿并不是不被知道,因为念在一切处都已现前,即使锯齿不触碰要锯的地方而去,以及回来时,也不存在锯齿不被知晓的情况。“精进”是指锯树时的勤力。“用功”是指那锯切的活动。“殊胜”是指成就多种状态,以及由此应当证得的卓越利益。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ kakacūpamāya sādhetuṃ ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhūmibhāgassa visamatāya cañcale rukkhe chedanakiriyā na sukarā siyā, tathā ca sati kakacadantagati dubbiññeyyāti āha ‘‘same bhūmibhāge’’ti. Kakacenāti khuddakena kharapattena. Tenāha ‘‘puriso’’ti. Phuṭṭhakakacadantānanti phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena. Tena kakacadantehi phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva purisassa satiyā upaṭṭhānaṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karotī’’ti. Kakacassa ākaḍḍhanakāle purisābhimukhaṃ pavattā āgatā. Pellanakāle tato vigatā ‘‘gatā’’ti vuttā. Na ca āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti sabbattha satiyā upaṭṭhitattā chinditabbaṭṭhānaṃ aphusitvā gacchantānaṃ, āgacchantānañca kakacadantānaṃ abhāvato. Padhānanti rukkhassa chedanavīriyaṃ . Payoganti tasseva chedanakiriyaṃ. Visesanti anekabhāvāpādanaṃ, tena ca sādhetabbaṃ payojanavisesaṃ.
“如树”等是譬喻的配合。念能把心系在所缘上,所以叫“能系”;它取入出息相,所以叫“能系之相”,也就是鼻端或口相。同样地,就像那个用锯子锯树的人,虽然不去注意来去的锯齿,但凭着在每一个接触处安立念,就能知道来去的锯齿,也不会错过墨线,能把该做的事完成;同样地,在鼻端或口相上,长鼻子的人取鼻端,其余的人取口相。“口相”就是上唇,因为靠它闭口,所以得到这个名字。巴利
Yathā rukkhotiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Upanibandhati ārammaṇe cittaṃ etāyāti sati upanibandhanā nāma, tassā assāsapassāsānaṃ sallakkhaṇassa nimittanti upanibandhanānimittaṃ, nāsikaggaṃ, mukhanimittaṃ vā. Evamevāti yathāpi so puriso kakacena rukkhaṃ chindanto āgatagate kakacadante amanasikarontopi phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva satiyā upaṭṭhapanena āgatagate kakacadante jānāti, suttapadañca avirajjhanto atthakiccaṃ sādheti, evameva. Nāsikagge mukhanimitteti dīghanāsiko nāsikagge itaro mukhaṃ dasanaṃ nimīyati chādīyati etenāti mukhanimittanti laddhanāme uttaroṭṭhe.
这个“勤修”是指:依靠这种精进的努力,已经发起精进的修行者,他的身体和心都变得堪能、适合修行、能够承担修行。这个精进就叫作“勤修”,这是用果来显示因。“诸随烦恼被断除”是指:作为心的随烦恼的诸盖,以镇伏的方式被断除。“诸寻止息”是指:因此,欲寻等邪寻得以止息;或者,通过断除诸盖来显示初禅的证得之后,再以“诸寻止息”的说法,说明第二禅等的证得。“此勤修”是指:这种对业处的随修,是证得禅那之因的勤修。“诸结被断除”是指:十种结依道的次第,以正断的方式被断除。“诸随眠被根绝”是指:同样,七种随眠由于令其不再生起,乃至最微细的残余也无余,便彻底灭尽。在这里,为了显示“结的断除”就是随眠的灭尽,而且结已断时随眠也不会有丝毫残余,所以说“诸结被断除,诸随眠被根绝”。“此殊胜”是指:依此定而次第获得的这些结的断除等,就是此定的殊胜,这就是其含义。巴利
Idaṃ padhānanti yena vīriyārambhena āraddhavīriyassa yogino kāyopi cittampi kammaniyaṃ bhāvanākammakkhamaṃ bhāvanākammayoggaṃ hoti, idaṃ vīriyaṃ padhānanti phalena hetuṃ dasseti. Upakkilesā pahīyantīti cittassa upakkilesabhūtāni nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhanavasena pahīyanti. Vitakkā vūpasamantīti tato eva kāmavitakkādayo micchāvitakkā upasamaṃ gacchanti, nīvaraṇappahānena vā paṭhamajjhānādhigamaṃ dassetvā vitakkavūpasamāpadesena dutiyajjhānādīnamadhigamamāha. Ayaṃ payogoti ayaṃ jhānādhigamassa hetubhūto kammaṭṭhānānuyogo payogo. Saṃyojanā pahīyantīti dasapi saṃyojanāni maggapaṭipāṭiyā samucchedavasena pahīyanti. Anusayā byantī hontīti tathā sattapi anusayā anuppattidhammatāpādanena bhaṅgamattassapi anavasesato vigatantā honti. Ettha ca saṃyojanappahānaṃ nāma anusayanirodheneva hoti, pahīnesu ca saṃyojanesu anusayānaṃ lesopi na bhavissatīti ca dassanatthaṃ ‘‘saṃyojanā pahīyanti anusayā byantī hontī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ visesoti imaṃ samādhiṃ nissāya anukkamena labbhamāno ayaṃ saṃyojanappahānādiko imassa samādhissa visesoti attho.
“以此”是指“用这个”。“次第地”是指“按顺序”。“已熟习”是指“已反复练习”。这里的大意是:入出息念就像佛陀、世尊所教导的那样,依照了知长短等方法,次第熟习、好好修习,因此得以圆满,因十六事的圆满而完全具足。那位比丘以智慧之光,照亮自己这个蕴等世间。就像月亮脱离云层,月天子摆脱了云的随烦恼,如同星宿之王。巴利
Yassāti yena. Anupubbanti anukkamena. Paricitāti pariciṇṇā. Ayaṃ hettha saṅkhepattho – ānāpānassati yathā buddhena bhagavatā desitā , tatheva yena dīgharassapajānanādividhinā anupubbaṃ paricitā suṭṭhu bhāvitā, tato eva paripuṇṇā soḷasannaṃ vatthūnaṃ pāripūriyā sabbaso puṇṇā. So bhikkhu imaṃ attano khandhādilokaṃ paññobhāsena pabhāseti. Yathā kiṃ abbhā muttova candimā abbhupakkilesavimutto candimā tārakarājā viyāti.
这里说的“此处”,是指在锯喻那段里。“其”指的是修行的人。或者,“此处”是指这个地方,“其”是指作为譬喻的那把锯。就像那个人对锯的来回拉动不作意一样,对入出息来去的本身,也只是以不作意为用功之处。巴利
Idhāti kakacūpamāyaṃ. Assāti yogino. Idhāti vā imasmiṃ ṭhāne. Assāti upamābhūtassa kakacassa. Āgatagatavasena yathā tassa purisassa amanasikāro, evaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ āgatagatavasena amanasikāramattameva payojanaṃ.
228 “相”是指似相。“为安止寻等其余禅支所庄严”:他们说,是为安止寻等其余禅支所庄严;但严格来说,应当说是为伺等所庄严,因为寻本身即是安止。寻在巴利圣典中被说为“安止、遍止”,又因为与它相应,注释书才把禅那称为“安止”;而且在诸禅支中,定是主导,所以为了显示那个“安止”,就说“为其余禅支所庄严、称为安止的住立得以成就”。不过,对某些人来说,从仅仅以计数方式作意的时候开始,“次第……中略……好像成了跳过去的状态”这一段文字已经缺失了。巴利
228.Nimittanti paṭibhāganimittaṃ. Avasesajhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitāti appanāvitakkādiavasesajhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitāti vadanti, vicārādīti pana vattabbaṃ nippariyāyena vitakkassa appanābhāvato. So hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘appanā byappanā’’ti (dha. sa. 7) niddiṭṭho, taṃsampayogato vā yasmā jhānaṃ ‘‘appanā’’ti aṭṭhakathāvohāro, jhānaṅgesu ca samādhi padhānaṃ, tasmā taṃ ‘‘appanā’’ti dassento ‘‘avasesajhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitā appanāsaṅkhātā ṭhapanā ca sampajjatī’’ti āha. Kassaci pana gaṇanāvaseneva manasikārakālato pabhutīti ettha ‘‘anukkamato…pe… laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hotī’’ti ettako gantho parihīno.
身体粗重的人,会因为倚靠板条之类的东西而向前倾。“发出声响”就是弄出声音。在四肢、臀部、手肘等关节连接的地方会挤出褶皱,到处都变得皱巴巴的。为什么?因为身体粗重的人,身体沉重。与身粗重止息一起成就的粗显入出息灭,是从遮遣的角度来说他的成就的。“以粗显入出息灭的方式”:是从随顺的角度来说明达成那个目的。其中,“身粗重止息时”:由于心生色法的轻快、柔软、适业,其余相续色法也具有轻快等性质,这里指的就是身的轻快。而这个身的轻快,如果没有心的轻快等就不可能存在,所以说“身和心都轻快”。巴利
Sāraddhakāyassa kassaci puggalassa. Onamati paṭṭikādīnaṃ palambanena. Vikūjatīti saddaṃ karoti. Gattānisadakapparādīnaṃ sandhiṭṭhānesu valiṃ gaṇhāti tattha tattha valitaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā sāraddhakāyo garuko hotīti kāyadarathavūpasamena saddhiṃ sijjhamāno oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodho byatirekamukhena tassa sādhanaṃ viya vutto. Oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasenāti anvayavasena tadatthasādhanaṃ. Tattha kāyadarathe vūpasanteti cittajarūpānaṃ lahumudukammaññabhāvena yo sesatisantatirūpānampi lahuādibhāvo, so idha kāyassa lahubhāvoti adhippeto. Svāyaṃ yasmā cittassa lahuādibhāvena vinā natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hotī’’ti.
“粗显的入出息灭”等,虽然前面已经讲过,但为了说明应当审察的、属于应被审察形态的身行,其审察方式,所以又引出来。巴利
Oḷārikeassāsapassāse niruddhetiādi heṭṭhā vuttanayampi vicetabbākārappattassa kāyasaṅkhārassa vicayanavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ānītaṃ.
229 越往上越清晰:靠着修习的力量,一层比一层更明显地显现出来。就处所来说:是指自然接触的地方,也就是先前自己以接触的方式所观察的那个位置。巴利
229.Uparūpari vibhūtānīti bhāvanābalena uddhaṃ uddhaṃ pākaṭāni honti. Desatoti pakatiyā phusanadesato, pubbe attanā phusanavasena upadhāritaṭṭhānato.
“在哪里没有”是就处所说,“谁没有”是就人说。为了把这两方面考察的含义合在一起讲清楚,所以说“在母胎中”等等。其中,就像沉入水中的人因为空间被阻断,入出息不再生起一样,在母胎中也是如此。就像死人因为没有能令生起的心,所以没有入出息一样,无想有情、昏迷的人、生于无想天的众生也是如此,入灭尽定的人也一样。而进入第四禅的人,他们的入出息不生起只是由于法性如此,色界和无色界的有情也是如此。不过有些人说:“由于渐次达到微细,所以进入第四禅的人没有入出息;由于色界中诸色和有分心的微细,所以色界的有情也没有。”他们这样说理由。意思是:那些入出息确实存在,只是寻求不到;因为离开了如上所说的七种处所,入出息不生起的处所并不存在。以自然触的方式,就是以自然接触的方式。应安立相,就是为了以念在处处令乐生起,而令更坚固地辨认生起。因为念以坚固之想为近因。只是这个,就是对于这个不现起的入出息,以安立荆棘的方式令其现起的方法本身。义利,就是因。因为义就是果,以它为因而生起,那就是义利。失念者,就是念已坏失的人。不正知者,就是缺乏正知的人,意思是:对于修习时渐次不现起的入出息,以念与正知去考察、确认“这些就是那些”的能力已缺失,即缺乏能正确了知的念与慧。巴利
‘‘Kattha natthī’’ti ṭhānavasena, ‘‘kassa natthī’’ti puggalavasena vīmaṃsiyamānamatthaṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘antomātukucchiya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā udake nimuggassa puggalassa niruddhokāsatāya assāsapassāsā na pavattanti, evaṃ antomātukucchiyaṃ. Yathā matānaṃ samuṭṭhāpakacittābhāvato, evaṃ asaññībhūtānaṃ mucchāparetānaṃ, asaññīsu vā jātānaṃ, tathā nirodhasamāpannānaṃ. Catutthajjhānasamāpannānaṃ pana dhammatāvaseneva nesaṃ anuppajjanaṃ, tathā rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘anupubbato sukhumabhāvappattiyā catutthajjhānasamāpannassa, rūpabhave rūpānaṃ bhavaṅgassa ca sukhumabhāvato rūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ natthī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti. Atthiyeva te assāsapassāsā pariyesatoti adhippāyo, yathāvuttasattaṭṭhānavinimuttassa assāsapassāsānaṃ anuppajjanaṭṭhānassa abhāvato. Pakatiphuṭṭhavasenāti pakatiyā phusanaṭṭhānavasena. Nimittaṃ ṭhapetabbanti satiyā tattha tattha sukhappavattanatthaṃ thiratarasañjānanaṃ pavattetabbaṃ. Thirasaññāpadaṭṭhānā hi sati. Imamevāti imaṃ eva anupaṭṭhahantassa kāyasaṅkhārassa kaṇṭakuṭṭhāpananayena upaṭṭhāpanavidhimeva. Atthavasanti hetuṃ. Atthoti hi phalaṃ, so yassa vasena pavattati, so atthavasoti. Muṭṭhassatissāti vinaṭṭhassatissa. Asampajānassāti sampajaññarahitassa, bhāventassa anukkamena anupaṭṭhahante assāsapassāse vīmaṃsitvā ‘‘ime te’’ti upadhāretuṃ, sammadeva pajānituñca samatthāhi satipaññāhi virahitassāti adhippāyo.
230 与前面所说的不同,这是另一种业处。“重”就是沉重。因为这种修习极其困难,所以说是“重的修习”。由于它一层比一层更达到微细寂静的状态,所以说完“应当希求有力、极清净、勇猛的念与慧”之后,为了表明:要成就微细的义理,也必须以微细的方式来进行,因此说了“正如……”等话。现在,为了说明对那些不现起的入出息该如何寻求,说了“而且以这些……”等话。其中,“于行境之口”就是面向行境。“随句”就是一句接着一句。“行已”就是执取行境之后。“即于彼处”就是于称为安止相之处。“系合”就是以作意系合。“以念之绳系缚”则是以念之绳系缚,或者说,这只是重述了已经说过的意思,即“于彼处系合”。因为系缚与系合之处,并非在所喻之法中各自分开可得。巴利
230.Ito aññaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ. Garukanti bhāriyaṃ. Sā cassa garukatā bhāvanāya sudukkarabhāvenāti āha ‘‘garukabhāvana’’nti. Uparūpari santasukhumabhāvappattito ‘‘balavatī suvisadā sūrā ca satipaññā ca icchitabbā’’ti vatvā sukhumassa nāma atthassa sādhanenāpi sukhumeneva bhavitabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idāni anupaṭṭhahantānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ pariyesanupāyaṃ dassento ‘‘tāhi ca panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha gocaramukheti gocarābhimukhe. Anupadanti padānupadaṃ. Caritvāti gocaraṃ gahetvā. Tasmiṃyeva ṭhāneti upanibandhanānimittasaññitaṭṭhāne. Yojetvāti manasikārena yojetvā. Satirasmiyā bandhitvāti vā vuttamevatthamāha ‘‘tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne yojetvā’’ti. Na hi upameyye bandhanayojanaṭṭhānāni visuṃ labbhanti.
231 “相”是指取相或似相。这里把两者合在一起说。因为棉絮等三个譬喻适用于取相,其余的则两者都适用。“有些”是指某些老师。巴利
231.Nimittanti uggahanimittaṃ, paṭibhāganimittaṃ vā. Ubhayampi hi idha ekajjhaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā hi tūlapicuādiupamattayaṃ uggahe yujjati, sesaṃ ubhayattha. Ekacceti eke ācariyā.
像星星的形状,就是像星星光芒的形状。摩尼珠等譬喻,是用在似相上的。那么,为什么同一个业处会以多种方式现起呢?所以说“而且这个”等等。“经”是指一部经。因为熟练运转时没有间断,而且所缘广大,所以说“像大山上的大河”。由于义理和文句都圆满,一部各方面都圆满的经,就像一片所有部分都令人欢喜、所有枝叶花果都盛开的树林,所以说“像一片树林”。因此世尊说:“像林丛中花满枝头。”具有种种连贯、种种重复、种种理趣、微妙、多种业处法门的经,求法的人应当恭敬地受持,所以说“像清凉树荫……的树”。“由于想的不同”,是指在相现起之前,先前生起的想有种种不同的状态。巴利
Tārakarūpaṃ viyāti tārakāya pabhārūpaṃ viya. Maṇiguḷikādiupamā paṭibhāge vaṭṭanti. Kathaṃ panetaṃ ekaṃyeva kammaṭṭhānaṃ anekākārato upaṭṭhātīti āha ‘‘tañca paneta’’ntiādi. Suttantanti ekaṃ suttaṃ. Paguṇappavattibhāvena avicchedaṃ, mahāvisayatañca sandhāyāha ‘‘mahatī pabbateyyā nadī viyā’’ti. Atthabyañjanasampattiyā samantabhaddakaṃ suttaṃ sabbabhāgamanoharā sabbapāliphullā vanaghaṭā viyāti āha ‘‘ekā vanarāji viyā’’ti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘vanappagumbe yatha phussitagge’’ti (khu. pā. 6.13; su. ni. 236). Nānānusandhikaṃ nānāpeyyālaṃ vividhanayanipuṇaṃ bahuvidhakammaṭṭhānamukhasuttantaṃ atthikehi sakkaccaṃ samupajīvitabbanti āha ‘‘sītacchāyo…pe… rukkho viyā’’ti. Saññānānatāyāti nimittupaṭṭhānato pubbeva pavattasaññānaṃ nānāvidhabhāvato.
“这三法”是指入息、出息和相,这三法。“不存在”是指:作为业处应当被作意的意义上,不存在、找不到。而“达不到近行”,是说连近行定都达不到,更不用说安止定了,这是它的意思。“然而对于有些人”,应当依照前面所说的方法,理解为存在的情况。巴利
Ime tayo dhammāti assāso, passāso, nimittanti ime tayo dhammā. Natthīti kammaṭṭhānavasena manasikātabbabhāvena natthi na upalabbhanti. Na ca upacāranti upacārampi na pāpuṇāti, pageva appananti adhippāyo. Yassa panāti vijjamānapakkho vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
现在,为了说明刚才所说的义理,引出了锯子譬喻中“相”等偈颂。巴利
Idāni vuttasseva atthassa samatthanatthaṃ kakacūpamāyaṃ āgatā ‘‘nimitta’’ntiādikā gāthā paccānītā.
232 “相”是指前面所说的似相。“会这样”是说,只有专心修习的人才会这样。所以应该对他说:“你要一次又一次地这样作意。”“会退缩”是说,他心里想:“相很难生起,现在好不容易得到了,那我以后随时都可以证得殊胜的境界”,于是就打退堂鼓。“会沮丧”是说,他心里想:“修了这么久,连相都还没生起,我恐怕没有能力证得殊胜的境界”,于是灰心丧气。巴利
232.Nimitteti yathāvutte paṭibhāganimitte. Evaṃ hotīti bhāvanamanuyuttassa eva hoti. Tasmā ‘‘punappunaṃ evaṃ manasi karohī’’ti vattabbo. Vosānaṃ āpajjeyyāti ‘‘nimittaṃ nāma dukkaraṃ uppādetuṃ, tayidaṃ laddhaṃ, handāhaṃ dāni yadā vā tadā vā visesaṃ nibbattessāmī’’ti saṅkocaṃ āpajjeyya. Visīdeyyāti ‘‘ettakaṃ kālaṃ bhāvanamanuyuttassa nimittampi na uppannaṃ, abhabbo maññe visesassā’’ti visādaṃ āpajjeyya.
有人这样说:“对于依这条修行道路而立志要从老死中解脱的人,相怎么会让他退缩呢?他反而应该更加努力精进。”于是中部诵者说:“这个相……应当这样说。”所谓“这样”,是指用上面所说的方式,把修习的心只安住在似相上。所谓“从此以后”,是指从似相生起之后开始。前面说过“他以随逐、触和安住而作意”,其中要舍弃随逐和触,只以安住的方式来修习;所以意思是:应当只以安住来修习。巴利
‘‘Imāya paṭipadāya jarāmaraṇato muccissāmīti paṭipannassa nimitta’’nti vutte kathaṃ saṅkocāpatti, bhiyyoso mattāya ussāhameva kareyyāti ‘‘nimittamidaṃ…pe… vattabbo’’ti majjhimabhāṇakā āhu. Evanti vuttappakārena paṭibhāganimitteyeva bhāvanācittassa ṭhapanena. Ito pabhutīti ito paṭibhāganimittuppattito paṭṭhāya. Pubbe yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘anubandhanāya ca phusanāya ca ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotī’’ti (visuddhi. 1.224), tattha anubandhanaṃ, phusanañca vissajjetvā ṭhapanāvasena bhāvanā hotīti ṭhapanāvaseneva bhāvetabbanti attho.
古人对这个意思已经说过了,所以诵出“于相”这一偈。其中,“相”指似相。“安立心”指把修习的心安放好,也就是以安放的方式作意。“种种相”指像“四色”那样所说的种种差别。这里是按相状的共同性而用单数。“令消失”指使其辨别而消失。因为从相生起之后,如果不作意,那些相状就好像消失了一样。“于入出息”指入出息中的种种相,令其消失,或者入出息所生的相中的种种相令其消失。“系缚自心”指就以那种安放,把自己的心紧系起来,令其投入。然而,那些将“令消失”解释为“使其辨别、令其显明、令其明显”的人,那种意思应以前分的方式来理解。这里的意思是这样的:由于具足坚定,坚定的瑜伽行者令入出息中的种种相消失,从种种相了知它们,令其被了知、令其明显;或者令种种相粗的与细的止息、寂止,在那里所获得的相,把心安放于其中,逐渐地系缚自己的心,令其投入。巴利
Porāṇehi vuttovāyamatthoti ‘‘nimitte’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha nimitteti paṭibhāganimitte. Ṭhapayaṃ cittanti bhāvanācittaṃ ṭhapento, ṭhapanāvasena manasi karontoti attho. Nānākāranti ‘‘cattāro vaṇṇā’’ti (visuddhi. 1.219; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163) evaṃ vuttaṃ nānākāraṃ. Ākārasāmaññavasena hetaṃ ekavacanaṃ. Vibhāvayanti vibhāvento antaradhāpento. Nimittuppattito paṭṭhāya hi te ākārā amanasikaroto antarahitā viya honti. Assāsapassāseti assāsapassāse yo nānākāro, taṃ vibhāvayaṃ, assāsapassāsasambhūte vā nimitte. Sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhatīti tāya eva ṭhapanāya attano cittaṃ upanibandhati, appetīti attho. Ye pana ‘‘vibhāvayanti vibhāvento viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto’’ti atthaṃ vadanti, taṃ pubbabhāgavasena yujjeyya. Ayañhettha attho – dhitisampannattā dhīro yogī assāsapassāse nānākāraṃ vibhāvento nānākārato te pajānanto vidite pākaṭe karonto, nānākāraṃ vā oḷārikoḷārike passambhento vūpasamento tattha yaṃ laddhaṃ nimittaṃ, tasmiṃ cittaṃ ṭhapento anukkamena sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhati appetīti.
从颜色来说,就像棉团、星形等所呈现的颜色那样。从特相来说,是从坚硬性等自性,或者从无常等特相来说。应当守护那个相——这是句中的关联。所谓守护相,其实就是守护在那里获得的近行定,所以说“以反复作意之力,使它增长、增广”。巴利
Vaṇṇatoti picupiṇḍatārakarūpādīsu viya upaṭṭhitavaṇṇato. Lakkhaṇatoti kharabhāvādisabhāvato, aniccādilakkhaṇato vā. Rakkhitabbaṃ taṃ nimittanti sambandho. Nimittassa rakkhaṇaṃ nāma tattha paṭiladdhassa upacārajhānassa rakkhaṇeneva hotīti āha ‘‘punappunaṃ manasikāravasena vuddhiṃ viruḷhiṃ gamayitvā’’ti.
233 在这里,指在这个身至念的修习中。想要达到清净的人,就是想要证得、想要进入的人。其中,应当这样理解:依观察与转向的方式而想要证得,依观察的方式而想要进入。为了把“安立名色之后建立观”这个简要说的内容详细展示出来,所以说了“如何”等。其中,“犹如”等部分,是显示身和心的入出息生起的状况。“铁匠的风箱”指铁匠炉子里用来吹火的皮囊。“正在吹动时”指正在鼓风、让风进入时。“与那相应”指与那相符合。这里应当同样地把这个业生身看作像铁匠的风箱,把心看作像精进。虽然入出息是心所生的,但如果没有这个业生身,它们就无法运作,所以说“依于身和心而有入出息”。巴利
233.Etthāti etissaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ. Pārisuddhiṃ pattukāmoti adhigantukāmo, samāpajjitukāmo ca, tattha sallakkhaṇāvivaṭṭanāvasena adhigantukāmo, sallakkhaṇāvasena samāpajjitukāmoti yojetabbaṃ. Nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetīti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā hītiādi kāyassa, cittassa ca assāsapassāsānaṃ samudayabhāvadassanaṃ. Kammāragaggariyāti kammārānaṃ ukkāyaṃ aggidhamanabhastā. Dhamamānāyāti dhamayantiyā, vātaṃ gāhāpentiyāti attho. Tajjanti tadanurūpaṃ. Evamevāti ettha kammāragaggarī viya karajakāyo, vāyāmo viya cittaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kiñcāpi assāsapassāsā cittasamuṭṭhānā, karajakāyaṃ pana vinā tesaṃ appavattanato ‘‘kāyañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“彼”指名色。“探寻其缘”指以“由无明集起而有色集起”等方式,审察、把握无明等缘。“度脱疑惑”指超越、断除以“我于过去世是否存在”等句类所起的十六种事相的疑惑。“凡任何色,过去、未来、现在”等句类所起的,是聚团思惟。在前分阶段:指在属于行道智见清净的生灭随观的前分阶段所生起的。光明等:即光明、智、喜、轻安、乐、胜解、策励、舍、现起、欲着——此十种光明等。舍弃生:指舍弃于生灭随观中所执取的诸行之生,唯随观其坏灭,从而证得坏灭随观智,以过患随观为先导,于厌离随观中厌离。于欲解脱、审察随观、行舍、随顺智的修习终了时,生起种姓智,紧接着生起道智,于一切诸行中离染、解脱。因为在道刹那,圣者被称为离染、解脱。故说“次第证得四圣道”。以道、果、涅槃、已断与残余烦恼所摄的应察法的差别,有十九种差别。对于阿拉汉,因无残余烦恼,故为十九种。“彼”指入出息念业处修行者。巴利
Tassāti nāmarūpassa. Paccayaṃ pariyesatīti ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.50) avijjādikaṃ paccayaṃ vīmaṃsati pariggaṇhāti. Kaṅkhaṃ vitaratīti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) ādinayappavattaṃ soḷasavatthukaṃ vicikicchaṃ atikkamati pajahati. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppanna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.347; 361; 3.86; a. ni. 4.181) ādinayappavattaṃ kalāpasammasanaṃ. Pubbabhāgeti paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhipariyāpannāya udayabbayānupassanāya pubbabhāge uppanne. Obhāsādayoti obhāso ñāṇaṃ pīti passaddhi sukhaṃ adhimokkho paggaho upekkhā upaṭṭhānaṃ nikantīti ime obhāsādayo dasa. Udayaṃ pahāyāti udayabbayānupassanāya gahitaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ udayaṃ vissajjetvā tesaṃ bhaṅgasseva anupassanato bhaṅgānupassanaṃ ñāṇaṃ patvā ādīnavānupassanāpubbaṅgamāya nibbidānupassanāya nibbindanto. Muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhānupassanāsaṅkhārupekkhānulomañāṇānaṃ ciṇṇapariyante uppannagotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ uppannena maggañāṇena sabbasaṅkhāresu virajjanto vimuccanto. Maggakkhaṇe hi ariyo virajjati vimuccatīti ca vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘yathākkamena cattāro ariyamagge pāpuṇitvā’’ti. Maggaphalanibbānapahīnāvasiṭṭhakilesasaṅkhātassa paccavekkhitabbassa pabhedena ekūnavīsatibhedassa. Arahato hi avasiṭṭhakilesābhāvena ekūnavīsatitā. Assāti ānāpānakammaṭṭhānikassa.
234 并没有另一种单独的业处修习方法,因为这里是按照初四法组证得禅那之后,再以受随观、心随观、法随观的方式来进行教导的。“他们”指的是三组四法组。巴利
234.Visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayo nāma natthi paṭhamacatukkavasena adhigatajhānassa vedanācittadhammānupassanāvasena desitattā. Tesanti tiṇṇaṃ catukkānaṃ.
感受喜,是指一次又一次、完整地、惯于感受喜;或者是他具有对那种喜一次又一次、完整的感受;或者是他正一次又一次、完整地感受着那种喜。在这里,其实单凭“感受”这个说法,就已经能表明对喜的了知是恭敬而认真的,这是从“觉知”来说的。然而,为了说明是以哪些方式想要感受那种喜,就采用了“paṭi”这个词,说“一次又一次地感受,所以是paṭisaṃvedī”。因此说“以两种方式”等等。巴利
Pītipaṭisaṃvedīti pītiyā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedanāsīlo, tassā vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedo etassa atthi, taṃ vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedayamāno. Tattha kāmaṃ saṃvedana-ggahaṇeneva pītiyā sakkaccaṃ viditabhāvo bodhito hoti, yehi pana pakārehi tassā saṃvedanaṃ icchitaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ paṭi-saddaggahaṇaṃ ‘‘paṭi paṭi saṃvedīti paṭisaṃvedī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘dvīhākārehī’’tiādi.
在这里,“如何从所缘来了知喜”是一个问句。入于有喜的两种禅那,意思是依次进入与喜俱行的初禅和第二禅。“彼”指的是由彼。因为要照应“了知”这个词,这里的属格是用来表达作者(行为者)的意思。于入定刹那,就是在入定的那个刹那。以得禅那,就是由于具足禅那。从所缘,就是以所缘为门;属于以彼为所缘的禅那的喜被了知,因为所缘已被了知。这说的是什么意思呢?就像寻找蛇的人,当蛇的住处被了知时,蛇也就被了知、被抓住了,因为靠咒术药力的力量,抓住它很容易;同样,当作为喜之住处的所缘被了知时,那喜也就依自相和共相被了知了,因为抓住它很容易。巴利
Tattha kathaṃ ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti pucchāvacanaṃ. Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjatīti pītisahagatāni dve paṭhamadutiyajhānāni paṭipāṭiyā samāpajjati. Tassāti tena. ‘‘Paṭisaṃviditā’’ti hi padaṃ apekkhitvā kattuatthe etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Samāpattikkhaṇeti samāpannakkhaṇe. Jhānapaṭilābhenāti jhānena samaṅgibhāvena. Ārammaṇatoti ārammaṇamukhena, tadārammaṇajhānapariyāpannā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇassa paṭisaṃviditattā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā nāma sappapariyesanaṃ carantena tassa āsaye paṭisaṃvidite sopi paṭisaṃvidito gahito eva hoti mantāgadabalena tassa gahaṇassa sukarattā, evaṃ pītiyā āsayabhūte ārammaṇe paṭisaṃvidite sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā eva hoti salakkhaṇato, sāmaññato ca tassā gahaṇassa sukarattāti.
怎样才是“以不痴迷而觉知喜”?应当把这句话接上前文来理解。内观刹那,就是以内观智慧达到锐利、明净时,从所缘境上观察的那个刹那。以通达特相,就是通过通达喜的自相和共相。因为,对任何一法,当它的自相和共相都被了知时,它就被如实地了知了。所以说“以不痴迷而觉知喜”。巴利
Kathaṃ asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Vipassanākkhaṇeti vipassanāpaññāya tikkhavisadappattāya visayato dassanakkhaṇe. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti pītiyā salakkhaṇassa, sāmaññalakkhaṇassa ca paṭivijjhanena. Yaṃ hi yassa visesato, sāmaññato ca lakkhaṇaṃ, tasmiṃ vidite so yāthāvato vidito eva hoti. Tenāha ‘‘asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotī’’ti.
现在,为了直接用巴利圣典本身来说明这个意思,所以说了“因为已经说过”等话。其中,关于“以长入息”等应当解说的内容,前面已经讲过了。不过在那里,是依据念和作意等来显示而引用圣典的;在这里,则是依据对喜的觉知来引用,而对喜的觉知在义理上已经分析过了。另外,这里的简要含义是:“以长入息”——就是依作为所缘的长入息而了知时,那喜就被觉知到了,应当这样连接理解。“了知心一境性、无散乱”——就是属于禅那的、名为“无散乱”的心一境性,以与它相应的慧来了知。正如喜通过所缘门被觉知,与它相应的诸法也同样通过所缘门被觉知。“念已现前”——就是依长入息而与禅那相应的念,安立在那个所缘上;通过所缘门,也可以说安立在禅那中。“以彼念”——以这样现前的彼念,以如前所说的彼智,由于所缘被善加了知,依于彼所缘,那喜就被觉知。对于“以长出息”等,也应当按同样的方式来理解其义理。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ pāḷiyā eva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha dīghaṃ assāsavasenātiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Tattha pana satokāritādassanavasena pāḷi āgatā, idha pītipaṭisaṃveditāvasena, pītipaṭisaṃveditā ca atthato vibhattā eva. Apica ayamettha saṅkhepattho – dīghaṃ assāsavasenāti dīghassa assāsassa ārammaṇabhūtassa vasena pajānato sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti sambandho. Cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānatoti jhānapariyāpannaṃ ‘‘avikkhepo’’ti laddhanāmaṃ cittassekaggataṃ taṃsampayuttāya paññāya pajānato. Yatheva hi ārammaṇamukhena pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti, evaṃ taṃsampayuttadhammāpi ārammaṇamukhena paṭisaṃviditā eva hontīti. Sati upaṭṭhitā hotīti dīghaṃ assāsavasena jhānasampayuttā sati tassa ārammaṇe upaṭṭhitā ārammaṇamukhena jhānepi upaṭṭhitā nāma hoti. Tāya satiyāti evaṃ upaṭṭhitāya tāya satiyā yathāvuttena tena ñāṇena suppaṭividitattā ārammaṇassa tassa vasena tadārammaṇā sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Dīghaṃ passāsavasenātiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.
前面已经按第一组四法,从所缘和不迷惑这两个方面,把觉知喜展示出来了。现在为了从所缘和不迷惑这两方面分别说明它,就说了“转向者”等这些话。其中,“转向者”是指转向禅那的人。“那喜”是指属于禅那的喜。“了知者”是指在入定的刹那,通过所缘这个门径而了知的人。应当这样连接:那喜已经被他觉知到了。“见者”是指从禅那出来之后,以见为本质的智去看的人。“观察者”是指观察禅那的人。“决意心者”是指这样决意禅那心的人:“我在这么一段时间里要具有禅那。”像这样,通过五种自在,以了知禅那为门径,从所缘方面展示了喜的觉知。巴利
Evaṃ paṭhamacatukkavasena dassitaṃ pītipaṭisaṃvedanaṃ ārammaṇato, asammohato ca vibhāgaso dassetuṃ ‘‘āvajjato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āvajjatoti jhānaṃ āvajjantassa. Sā pītīti sā jhānapariyāpannā pīti. Jānatoti samāpannakkhaṇe ārammaṇamukhena jānato. Tassa sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti sambandho. Passatoti dassanabhūtena ñāṇena jhānato vuṭṭhāya passantassa. Paccavekkhatoti jhānaṃ paccavekkhantassa. Cittaṃ adhiṭṭhahatoti ‘‘ettakaṃ velaṃ jhānasamaṅgī bhavissāmī’’ti jhānacittaṃ adhiṭṭhahantassa. Evaṃ pañcannaṃ vasībhāvānaṃ vasena jhānassa pajānanamukhena ārammaṇato pītiyā paṭisaṃvedanā dassitā.
现在,为了说明依靠哪些法能够成就禅那和观,也就是属于禅那和属于观道的信等法,而说“以信胜解”等话。其中,“胜解”是指相信,意思是依止和观。“策励精进”等也是这样理解。“应证知”是指以殊胜的智慧了知。“证知”是指以内观智慧为先导的道智了知。“应遍知”是指以审察遍知和道智遍知苦谛。“应断”是指以断遍知和道智断除集谛。“修习、作证”是指修习应修的道谛,证得应证的灭谛。不过,这里有些人只就喜举出应证知等,这是不合理的,因为本意是先举出禅那等整体,再从中特别指出喜。巴利
Idāni yehi dhammehi jhānaṃ, vipassanā ca sijjhanti; tesaṃ jhānapariyāpannānaṃ, vipassanāmaggapariyāpannānañca saddhādīnaṃ vasena pītipaṭisaṃvedanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhāya adhimuccato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha adhimuccatoti saddahantassa, samathavipassanāvasenāti adhippāyo. Vīriyaṃ paggaṇhatotiādīsupi eseva nayo. Abhiññeyyanti abhivisiṭṭhāya paññāya jānitabbaṃ. Abhijānatoti vipassanāpaññāpubbaṅgamāya maggapaññāya jānato. Pariññeyyanti dukkhasaccaṃ tīraṇapariññāya, maggapaññāya ca parijānato. Pahātabbanti samudayasaccaṃ pahānapariññāya, maggapaññāya ca pajahato. Bhāvayato sacchikaroto bhāvetabbaṃ maggasaccaṃ , sacchikātabbaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ. Keci panettha pītiyā eva vasena abhiññeyyādīni uddharanti, taṃ ayuttaṃ jhānādisamudāyaṃ uddharitvā tato pītiyā niddhāraṇassa adhippetattā.
在这里,依“以长入息”等第一组四法,从所缘方面说明了觉知喜;同样,以“转向者”等五句也作了说明。而以“应证知者证知”等,则从不痴迷方面作了说明。以“以信胜解者”等,则从两方面都作了说明。应当知道,简要来说:依止的方面是从所缘,依内观的方面是从不痴迷,而说觉知喜。那么,为什么在这里的受随观中,是以喜为代表来取受,而不是直接以受本身来取呢?这是为了依地等的区别将受分门别类,显示四种受随观。再者,世尊在显示受业处时,因为喜比较粗显,为了让人把握与喜相应的乐,所以以喜为代表来显示。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘dīghaṃ assāsavasenā’’tiādinā paṭhamacatukkavasena ārammaṇato pītipaṭisaṃvedanaṃ vuttaṃ, tathā ‘‘āvajjato’’tiādīhi pañcahi padehi. ‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhijānato’’tiādīhi pana asammohato. ‘‘Saddhāya adhimuccato’’tiādīhi ubhayathāpīti saṅkhepato samathavasena ārammaṇato, vipassanāvasena asammohato pītipaṭisaṃvedanaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kasmā panettha vedanānupassanāyaṃ pītisīsena vedanā gahitā, na sarūpato evāti? Bhūmivibhāgādivasena vedanaṃ bhinditvā catudhā vedanānupassanaṃ dassetuṃ. Apica vedanākammaṭṭhānaṃ dassento bhagavā pītiyā oḷārikattā taṃsampayuttasukhaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ pītisīsena dasseti.
按照同样的方式,其余几句——“觉知乐”“觉知心行”这些句子——应当依照“觉知喜”那句里已经出现的方式,从含义上来理解。因为可以把乐等词代入喜所在的位置,比如“以两种方式觉知乐、觉知心行——从所缘的角度”等等,从而理解“进入与乐俱行的三禅或四禅”等含义。因此说“依三禅”等等。说到“受等”,这个“等”字包含了想,所以说“二蕴”。为了显示内观的阶段——也就是依杂多行的思惟来显示内观的阶段——由于在止禅中没有身乐,所以说“乐,有两种乐”等等。“彼”就是以寂止的同义词所说的灭。这在《清净道论》中“这位比丘先前未执取时”等段落里,已就身行详细说明了,所以应依照那里所说的方式来理解。那里是依身行来说的,这里是依心行来说的,差别就在这里。巴利
Eteneva nayena avasesapadānīti ‘‘sukhapaṭisaṃvedī cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedī’’ti padāni pītipaṭisaṃvedipade āgatanayeneva atthato veditabbāni. Sakkā hi ‘‘dvīhākārehi sukhapaṭisaṃveditā hoti, cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃveditā hoti ārammaṇato’’tiādinā pītiṭṭhāne sukhādipadāni pakkhipitvā ‘‘sukhasahagatāni tīṇi jhānāni, cattāri vā jhānāni samāpajjatī’’tiādinā atthaṃ viññātuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ jhānānaṃ vasenā’’tiādi. Vedanādayoti ādi-saddena saññā gahitā. Tenāha ‘‘dve khandhā’’ti. Vipassanābhūmidassanatthanti pakiṇṇakasaṅkhārasammasanavasena vipassanāya bhūmidassanatthaṃ ‘‘sukhanti dve sukhānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ samathe kāyikasukhābhāvato. Soti so passambhanapariyāyena vutto nirodho. ‘‘Imassa hi bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle’’tiādinā (visuddhi. 1.220) vitthārato kāyasaṅkhāre vutto, tasmā vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Tattha kāyasaṅkhāravasena āgato, idha cittasaṅkhāravasenāti ayameva viseso.
像这样,用引申的方式说明了心行的止息之后,为了说明在这个四法组里其他应当讲的内容,就说了“复次”等话。其中,“喜句”指的是“觉知喜者”等教导的那一部分。以喜为首来说受,意思是借着喜这个名称来说与它相应的受,并不是在说喜本身,这就是这里的用意。其中的理由,前面已经说过了。“两个心行句”,指的是“觉知心行”“止息心行”这两个与心行相关的文句。依据“识缘名色”的说法,由心所系缚的,就叫作心所系缚。正因为如此,虽然可以说由心所造作的是心行,比如想、受等,但在这里只是举出想和受作为代表,所以说“与想相应的受”。巴利
Evaṃ cittasaṅkhārassa passambhanaṃ atidesena dassetvā yadaññaṃ imasmiṃ catukke vattabbaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pītipadeti ‘‘pītipaṭisaṃvedī’’tiādinā desitakoṭṭhāse. Pītisīsena vedanā vuttāti pītiapadesena taṃsampayuttā vedanā vuttā, na pītīti adhippāyo. Tattha kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Dvīsu cittasaṅkhārapadesūti ‘‘cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedī passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāra’’nti cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃyuttesu dvīsu padesu. ‘‘Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti (mahāva. 1; ma. ni. 3.126; udā. 1) vacanato cittena paṭibaddhāti cittapaṭibaddhā. Tato eva kāmaṃ cittena saṅkharīyantīti cittasaṅkhārā, saññāvedanādayo, idha pana upalakkhaṇamattaṃ saññā vedanāva adhippetāti āha ‘‘saññāsampayuttā vedanā’’ti.
235 235. “觉知心者”:在这里,对心的觉知有两种方式:从所缘方面,以及从不迷惑方面。如何是从所缘方面?他进入四种禅那,在入定的刹那,依照“由获得禅那”等所说的方式,一切都很容易理解,所以说“应当知道,依四种禅那而有对心的觉知”。“令心喜悦”:就是让与禅相应的心,借着与它相应的喜而喜悦;或者,以那喜为所缘而生起的观照心,借着那作为所缘的喜而喜悦。“令欢悦”等词句是它的同义词,因为它们是喜的别名。巴利
235. Cittapaṭisaṃvedīti ettha dvīhākārehi cittapaṭisaṃveditā hoti ārammaṇato, asammohato ca. Kathaṃ ārammaṇato? Cattāri jhānāni samāpajjati, tassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānapaṭilābhenātiādinā vuttanayānusārena sabbaṃ suviññeyyanti āha ‘‘catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena cittapaṭisaṃveditā veditabbā’’ti. Cittaṃ modentoti jhānasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ sampayuttāya pītiyā modayamāno, taṃ vā pītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattaṃ vipassanācittaṃ tāya eva ārammaṇabhūtāya pītiyā modayamāno. Pamodentotiādīni padāni tasseva vevacanāni pītipariyāyabhāvato.
以相应的喜让心喜悦:与禅心相应、作为喜觉支、具有清新特质的禅喜,通过俱生等缘和禅缘,让那禅心不断增长,达到欢喜踊跃的状态,于是使心喜悦、欢悦。作为所缘:瑜伽行者以殊胜的、与禅相应的喜为所缘,生起观照心,凭借那已成为所缘的喜,让心达到欢喜踊跃的状态,这就称为喜悦、欢悦。巴利
Sampayuttāya pītiyā cittaṃ āmodetīti jhānacittasampayuttāya pītisambojjhaṅgabhūtāya odagyalakkhaṇāya jhānapītiyā tameva jhānacittaṃ sahajātādipaccayavasena ceva jhānapaccayavasena ca paribrūhento haṭṭhapahaṭṭhākāraṃ pāpento āmodeti pamodeti ca. Ārammaṇaṃ katvāti uḷāraṃ jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānaṃ vipassanācittaṃ tāya eva ārammaṇabhūtāya pītiyā yogāvacaro haṭṭhapahaṭṭhākāraṃ pāpento ‘‘āmodeti pamodetī’’ti vuccati.
“平等地安立”:就是既不落入哪怕一点点昏沉的那一边,也不落入掉举的那一边,不低垂、不高扬,就像诸根以均等的运作而不偏斜,或者由于定达到极致而获得不动,如此真正稳固地安住,以安止的方式而安立。“以通达相”:就是通过对无常等相一次又一次地洞察,在每一刹那中觉知。“刹那心一境性”:就是只住留一刹那的定。那定也确实在所缘上无间断地以单一方式运行,不被敌对法所压倒,就像安止一样使心不动而安住。因此说“如是生起”等。巴利
Samaṃ ṭhapentoti yathā īsakampi līnapakkhaṃ, uddhaccapakkhañca anupagamma anonataṃ anunnataṃ yathā indriyānaṃ samattapaṭipattiyā avisamaṃ, samādhissa vā ukkaṃsagamanena āneñjappattiyā sammadeva ṭhitaṃ hoti, evaṃ appanāvasena ṭhapento. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti aniccādikassa lakkhaṇassa paṭi paṭi vijjhanena khaṇe khaṇe avabodhena. Khaṇikacittekaggatāti khaṇamattaṭṭhitiko samādhi. Sopi hi ārammaṇe nirantaraṃ ekākārena pavattamāno paṭipakkhena anabhibhūto appito viya cittaṃ niccalaṃ ṭhapeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ uppannāyā’’tiādi.
令解脱:就是以镇伏解脱的方式让心远离、分开,也就是断除诸盖的意思。在观照的刹那:就是在坏灭随观的刹那。因为坏灭确实是无常的终极,所以那位修坏灭随观的瑜伽行者,通过心的门径,把一切诸行都看作无常,而不是看作恒常。由于无常的就是苦,苦的就是无我,所以他就观那同样的诸行为苦,而不是观为乐;观为无我,而不是观为我。又因为凡是无常、苦、无我的,就不应该欢喜;凡不应该欢喜的,就不应该染着。因此,随着坏灭的所见,当诸行被看作“无常、苦、无我”时,他对那诸行厌离,而不欢喜;离欲,而不染着。他这样厌离、离欲时,暂时只以世间智令贪灭尽,而不令它生起,也就是不让它生起的意思。或者,他这样离欲之后,对于已经见到的诸行,也以自己的智令未见的诸行灭尽,而不令它们生起;也就是说,他只作意于灭,而不作意于生起。他这样修行时,就舍离,而不执取。这话说的是什么呢?这无常等随观,连同诸蕴行一起,由于舍弃烦恼,由于见到有为法的过患而倾向于与之相反的涅槃,所以被称为舍离的舍离和趣入的舍离。因此,具备这种观的瑜伽行者,按照所说的方式,既舍弃烦恼,又趣入涅槃。所以说:“他在观照的刹那,以无常随观从常想中令心解脱、令心离……以舍离随观从执取中令心解脱、令心离,而出息、入息。”巴利
Mocentoti vikkhambhanavimuttivasena vivecento visuṃ karonto, nīvaraṇāni pajahantoti attho. Vipassanākkhaṇeti bhaṅgānupassanākkhaṇe. Bhaṅgo hi nāma aniccatāya paramā koṭi, tasmā tāya bhaṅgānupassako yogāvacaro cittamukhena sabbasaṅkhāragataṃ aniccato passati, no niccato. Aniccassa dukkhattā, dukkhassa ca anattakattā tadeva dukkhato anupassati, no sukhato. Anattato anupassati, no attato. Yasmā pana yaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā, na taṃ abhinanditabbaṃ. Yañca na abhinanditabbaṃ, na taṃ rañjitabbaṃ. Tasmā bhaṅgadassanānusārena ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti saṅkhāragate diṭṭhe tasmiṃ nibbindati, no nandati. Virajjati, no rajjati. So evaṃ nibbindanto virajjanto lokiyeneva tāva ñāṇena rāgaṃ nirodheti, no samudeti, nāssa samudayaṃ karotīti attho. Atha vā so evaṃ viratto yathā diṭṭhaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ, tathā adiṭṭhaṃ attano ñāṇena nirodheti, no samudeti. Nirodhamevassa manasikaroti, no samudayanti attho. So evaṃ paṭipanno paṭinissajjati, no ādiyati. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ayañhi aniccādianupassanā saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilesānaṃ pariccajanato, saṅkhatadosadassanena tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandanato pariccāgapaṭinissaggo pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo cāti vuccati. Tasmā tāya samannāgato yogāvacaro vuttanayena kilese ca pariccajati, nibbāne ca pakkhandati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘so vipassanākkhaṇe aniccānupassanāya niccasaññāto cittaṃ mocento vimocento…pe… paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānato cittaṃ mocento vimocento assasati ceva passasati cā’’ti.
在这里,无常随观就是观无常,或者以“无常”的方式观察。这是取三界诸法的无常性而生起的观智的名称。“从常想”:就是对有为法生起“常、永恒”这种错误认知。应当知道,以想为代表,心和邪见也包括在内。这个道理对乐想等也一样。“以厌离随观”:就是以厌离诸行的方式生起的随观。“从欢喜”:就是从带有喜的渴爱。“以离欲随观”:就是以那样离欲的方式生起的随观。因此说“令从贪解脱”。“以灭随观”:就是观照诸行的灭。或者,诸行就是这样灭尽,未来不再以再生而生起,这样观照就是灭随观。因为这种想要解脱的意愿已经达到强有力的程度。因此说“令从生起解脱”。以舍弃的方式生起的随观,就是舍离随观。“从执取”:就是从以常想等而执取,或者从结生的执取。这里的含义应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha aniccassa, aniccanti vā anupassanā aniccānupassanā. Tebhūmakadhammānaṃ aniccataṃ gahetvā pavattāya vipassanāya etaṃ nāmaṃ. Niccasaññātoti saṅkhatadhamme ‘‘niccā sassatā’’ti pavattāya micchāsaññāya. Saññāsīsena cittadiṭṭhīnampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo sukhasaññādīsupi. Nibbidānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu nibbindanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nanditoti sappītikataṇhāto. Virāgānupassanāyāti tathā virajjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘rāgato mocento’’ti. Nirodhānupassanāyāti saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhassa anupassanāya. Yathā saṅkhārā nirujjhantiyeva, āyatiṃ punabbhavavasena na uppajjanti, evaṃ vā anupassanā nirodhānupassanā. Muñcitukamyatā hi ayaṃ balappattā. Tenāha ‘‘samudayato mocento’’ti. Paṭinissajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Ādānatoti niccādivasena gahaṇato, paṭisandhiggahaṇato vāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
236 236. “无常”是指随观者,或者具有随观无常的习性,这就是无常随观。那么在这里,什么是无常?怎样是无常?什么是无常随观?谁在修无常随观?这四法应当分辨清楚。为了说明这一点,所以说“无常应了知”等语。巴利
236. Aniccanti anupassī, aniccassa vā anupassanasīlo aniccānupassīti ettha kiṃ panetaṃ aniccaṃ, kathaṃ vā aniccaṃ, kā vā aniccānupassanā, kassa vā aniccānupassanāti catukkaṃ vibhāvetabbanti taṃ dassento ‘‘aniccaṃ veditabba’’ntiādimāha.
这里,“常”是指恒常、永久,就像涅槃那样;不是常,就是无常,也就是有生有灭,从义理上说,就是有为法。所以论中说:“无常就是五蕴。为什么?因为有生、灭、变异。”意思就是具有生、灭、变异。其中,有为法依靠各种因缘而生起,之前没有而现在出现、获得自体,这就是“生”。这些法生起之后,刹那之间坏灭、消亡,这就是“灭”。由于变老而发生变化,这就是“变异”。因为,就像在生起的阶段变易时,在坏灭的阶段并没有实体的差别;同样,在称为住的阶段、正面向坏灭的时候,也没有实体的差别,只是在这里安立“老”这个说法。因此,即使是对单一的法,“老”也适用,这就叫作“刹那老”。而且,必须承认在生起和坏灭这两个阶段中,实体并没有差别,否则就会犯这样的过失:“一个法生起,另一个法坏灭。”正是针对这种刹那老,论中说“变异”。至于这里还应当说明的内容,我们后面再讲。巴利
Tattha niccaṃ nāma dhuvaṃ sassataṃ yathā taṃ nibbānaṃ, na niccanti aniccaṃ, udayabbayavantaṃ, atthato saṅkhatā dhammāti āha ‘‘aniccanti pañcakkhandhā. Kasmā? Uppādavayaññathattabhāvā’’ti, uppādavayaññathattasabbhāvāti attho. Tattha saṅkhatadhammānaṃ hetupaccayehi uppajjanaṃ ahutvā sambhavo attalābho uppādo. Uppannānaṃ tesaṃ khaṇanirodho vināso vayo. Jarāya aññathābhāvo aññathattaṃ. Yathā hi uppādāvatthāya bhinnāya bhaṅgāvatthāyaṃ vatthubhedo natthi, evaṃ ṭhitisaṅkhātāya bhaṅgābhimukhāvatthāyampi vatthubhedo natthi, yattha jarāvohāro. Tasmā ekassāpi dhammassa jarā yujjati, yā khaṇikajarāti vuccati. Ekaṃsena ca uppādabhaṅgāvatthāsu vatthuno abhedo icchitabbo, aññathā ‘‘añño uppajjati, añño bhijjatī’’ti āpajjeyya . Tayimaṃ khaṇikajaraṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘aññathatta’’nti. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato kathayissāma.
因为具有这三相,诸蕴才得到“无常”这个名称;在这三相之中,安立了“无常性”这个名称。因此,先说明“无常性就是它们的生、灭、变异”,然后为了特别指出:诸法在刹那灭尽时,才施设“无常性”这个说法,所以接着说“或者成为已存在而后不存在”等话。其中,因为不存在是以生起为前提,所以用“成为已存在”来表达,借此显示:坏灭是以显现为前提。以同样的方式,就是以生起的方式。以刹那坏灭,就是刹那灭。对于那种无常性,也就是被称为刹那坏灭的无常性,以那种观法,也就是如前所说的无常随观。具足者,就是具备这种观的瑜伽行者。巴利
Yassa lakkhaṇattayassa bhāvā khandhesu aniccasamaññā, tasmiṃ lakkhaṇattaye aniccatāsamaññāti ‘‘aniccatāti tesaṃyeva uppādavayaññathatta’’nti vatvā visesato dhammānaṃ khaṇikanirodhe aniccatāvohāroti dassento ‘‘hutvā abhāvo vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha uppādapubbakattā abhāvassa hutvāgahaṇaṃ. Tena pākabhāvapubbakattaṃ vināsabhāvassa dasseti. Tenevākārenāti nibbattanākāreneva. Khaṇabhaṅgenāti khaṇikanirodhena. Tassā aniccatāyāti khaṇikabhaṅgasaṅkhātāya aniccatāya. Tāya anupassanāyāti yathāvuttāya aniccānupassanāya. Samannāgatoti samaṅgibhūto yogāvacaro.
“灭尽”是指诸行的坏灭、消亡;“离欲”是指它们的消散、瓦解。“灭尽”本身就是“离欲”,所以叫“灭尽离欲”,也就是刹那灭。在这里,当证得这个(涅槃)时,诸行彻底离欲、寂灭,所以叫“究竟离欲”,也就是涅槃。因此说:“灭尽离欲是诸行的刹那坏灭,究竟离欲是涅槃。”应当这样理解:依这两种而转起的——依灭尽离欲观而转起的是观智,依究竟离欲观而转起的是圣道。或者,观智依灭尽离欲观而转起,是就所缘来说;依究竟离欲观而转起,是就它的倾向来说。而圣道依灭尽离欲观而转起,是就不迷惑来说;依究竟离欲观而转起,是就所缘来说。应当这样了知。“此即同理”这句话,是说依照“离欲随观”这个词所讲的方式,类推“两种灭:灭尽灭和究竟灭”等义释,所以应当把“灭”字放到“离欲”那里,按照这里所说的“诸行的坏灭”等道理来理解它的义释。巴利
Khayo saṅkhārānaṃ vināso, virajjanaṃ tesaṃyeva vilujjanaṃ virāgo, khayo eva virāgo khayavirāgo, khaṇikanirodho. Accantamettha etasmiṃ adhigate saṅkhārā virajjanti nirujjhantīti accantavirāgo, nibbānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khayavirāgo saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgo, accantavirāgo nibbāna’’nti. Tadubhayavasena pavattāti khayavirāgānupassanāvasena vipassanāya, accantavirāgānupassanāvasena maggassa pavatti yojetabbā. Ārammaṇato vā vipassanāya khayavirāgānupassanāvasena pavatti, tanninnabhāvato accantavirāgānupassanāvasena, maggassa pana asammohato khayavirāgānupassanāvasena, ārammaṇato accantavirāgānupassanāvasena pavatti veditabbā. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā yasmā virāgānupassī-pade vuttanayānusārena ‘‘dve nirodhā khayanirodho ca accantanirodho cā’’ti evamādiatthavaṇṇanaṃ atidisati, tasmā virāgaṭṭhāne nirodhapadaṃ pakkhipitvā ‘‘khayo saṅkhārānaṃ vināso’’tiādinā idha vuttanayena tassa atthavaṇṇanā veditabbā.
舍遣,是指对应当断除的法,以彼分断的方式或正断的方式加以舍弃、抛弃,这就是弃舍之舍遣。同样,在作为一切依着之舍遣的无为涅槃中,把自己投入进去,或者因为心倾向于它,或者以它为所缘而跃入其中,这就是投入之舍遣。巴利
Paṭinissajjanaṃ pahātabbassa tadaṅgavasena vā samucchedavasena vā pariccajanaṃ pariccāgapaṭinissaggo. Tathā sabbūpadhīnaṃ paṭinissaggabhūte visaṅkhāre attano nissajjanaṃ, tanninnatāya vā tadārammaṇatāya vā tattha pakkhandanaṃ pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo.
“以彼分断的方式”这句话是说:在这里,无常随观首先以彼分断的方式舍弃常想;而在舍弃时,通过使它不再生起,也就舍弃了那些由于执取“常”而会生起的烦恼、以烦恼为根的诸行,以及以烦恼和诸行两者为根、将来会生起的果报蕴——也就是通过让这一切都不再生起而舍弃。对苦想等也是这样。因此说“观确实以彼分断的方式,连同诸蕴与诸行一起舍弃烦恼”。巴利
Tadaṅgavasenāti ettha aniccānupassanā tāva tadaṅgappahānavasena niccasaññaṃ pariccajati, pariccajantī ca tathā appavattiyaṃ ye ‘‘nicca’’nti gahaṇavasena kilesā, tammūlakā abhisaṅkhārā, tadubhayamūlakā ca vipākakkhandhā anāgate uppajjeyyuṃ, te sabbepi appavattikaraṇavasena pariccajati, tathā dukkhasaññādayo. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanā hi tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajatī’’ti.
通过见到有为法的过患:就是通过见到三界中诸行的无常等过患。以常等状态存在的,则与那些相反。由于倾向那里,就是由于信解那里。投入:就是进入,好像正在进入一样。连同诸蕴与诸行一起舍弃烦恼:当烦恼被圣道舍弃时,由于使诸行成为不再感果之法,以及使以它们为根的诸蕴不再生起,所以说它们全都被舍弃了;因此说圣道舍弃一切。二者:指观智和道智。道智也确实因为在种姓智之后见到涅槃,所以被称为观。巴利
Saṅkhatadosadassanenāti saṅkhate tebhūmake saṅkhāragate aniccatādidosadassanena. Niccādibhāvena tabbiparīte. Tanninnatāyāti tadadhimuttatāya. Pakkhandatīti anupavisati anupavisantaṃ viya hoti. Saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajatīti maggena kilesesu pariccattesu avipākadhammatāpādanena abhisaṅkhārā, tammūlakā ca khandhā anuppattirahabhāvena pariccattā nāma hontīti sabbepi te maggo pariccajatīti vuttaṃ. Ubhayanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ, maggañāṇañca. Maggañāṇampi hi gotrabhuñāṇassa anu pacchā nibbānadassanato ‘‘anupassanā’’ti vuccati.
“以十六事来说”以及“ca”这个词表示集合:依十六种事来说,也依所宣说的寂静状态等来说。应当把“入出息念已修习”这句话引过来连接。巴利
Soḷasavatthuvasena cāti soḷasannaṃ vatthūnaṃ vasenāpi vuccamānasantabhāvādivasenāpīti samuccayattho ca-saddo. ‘‘Ānāpānassati bhāvitā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
237 此指的是入出息念定。应当知道,它也因为能够切断欲寻等寻而具有大功德,要这样把前后文连接起来。此就是入出息念定。心在种种高低不同的所缘中到处运转,就是从这里那里四处游荡。巴利
237.Assāti ānāpānassatisamādhissa. Kāmavitakkādivitakkupacchedasamatthatāyapi mahānisaṃsatā veditabbāti sambandho. Ayanti ānāpānassatisamādhi. Uccāvacesu ārammaṇesu pavattiyeva ito cito ca cittassa vidhāvanaṃ.
“明”就是道,“解脱”是果。“根本性”是指作为观禅基础的状态。他圆满四念处,是因为通过身随观等四种随观,使那修习得以展开。他们圆满七觉支,是因为若无觉支的修习,四念处修习的圆满便不存在。他们圆满明与解脱,是因为觉支的修习使它们达到顶点。“最后者”就是最终的那些。巴利
Vijjā nāma maggo. Vimutti phalaṃ. Mūlabhāvo vipassanāya pādakabhāvo. Cattāro satipaṭṭhāne paripūreti kāyānupassanādīnaṃ catunnaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena tassā bhāvanāya pavattanato. Satta bojjhaṅge paripūrenti bojjhaṅgabhāvanāya vinā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāpāripūriyā abhāvato. Vijjāvimuttiṃ paripūrenti bojjhaṅgabhāvanāya tāsaṃ sikhāppattibhāvato. Carimakānanti antimakānaṃ.
238 “以灭尽之力”就是指依止息之力。“有的最后”是指依有而言的最后,也就是低劣生命流转的最后。同样,也应知道“禅那的最后”。“死亡的最后”是指死亡时的最后,即在死亡刹那生起、一切中的最末。“因此”是指在三有中的低劣欲有里生起。“它们”是指入出息。“之前”是指下面。由于《分别论注释》中阐明色法具有十六心识刹那的寿命,所以说“与第十六心识一同生起”。或者,若取“死亡心之前”,以死亡心为界限,取其前,则说“与第十六心识一同生起”;按这种意思来理解时,入出息就被说为具有十七心识刹那的寿命。巴利
238.Nirodhavasenāti nirujjhanavasena. Bhavacarimakāti bhavavasena carimakā nihīnabhavapavattino. Tathā jhānacarimakā veditabbā. Cuticarimakāti cutiyā carimakā cutikkhaṇapavattino sabbapariyosānakā. Tasmāti tīsu bhavesu nihīne kāmabhave pavattanato. Teti assāsapassāsā. Puratoti heṭṭhā. Yasmā vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 26 pakiṇṇakakathā) rūpadhammānaṃ soḷasacittakkhaṇāyukatā vibhāvitā, tasmā ‘‘soḷasamena cittena saddhiṃ uppajjitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Cuticittassa puratoti vā cuticittaṃ avadhibhāvena gahetvā tato oraṃ soḷasamena cittena saddhiṃ uppajjitvāti evaṃ pana atthe gayhamāne sattarasacittakkhaṇāyukatāva assāsapassāsānaṃ vuttā hoti.
据说,对于专心修习这个业处的比丘,这些会变得清楚明显,于是引出这样的关联。在这里,说明了原因:“因为很好地把握了入出息所缘。”为了阐明这个含义,才说了“死亡心”等。巴利
Ime kira imaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuttassa bhikkhuno pākaṭā hontīti ānetvā sambandho. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘ānāpānārammaṇassa suṭṭhu pariggahitattā’’ti. Tamevatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘cuticittassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,所谓“寿量之间”,就是指生命持续的时间,也就是生命刹那的界限。“法性如是”的意思是:就自性而言;或者说,就意愿而言。巴利
Tattha āyuantaraṃ nāma jīvitantaraṃ jīvanakkhaṇāvadhi. Dhammatāya evāti sabhāveneva, rucivasenevāti attho.
看过月光之后:在月圆日的黄昏时分,他看见天空就像从四面八方倾泻下来的乳汁流,地面又像铺满了银板一样的沙地,心想:这时候真让人舒服,这地方也正合我的心意,这苦的担子到底还要挑多久呢?他这样思量自己的寿命行,令它灭尽,这就是这里的意思。划过线之后:就是在经行处横着划了一条线之后。巴利
Candālokaṃ oloketvāti juṇhapakkhe padosavelāyaṃ samantato āsiñcamānakhīradhāraṃ viya gaganatalaṃ, rajatapattasadisavālikāsanthatañca bhūmibhāgaṃ disvā ‘‘ramaṇīyo vatāyaṃ kālo, deso ca mama ajjhāsayasadiso, kīva ciraṃ nu kho ayaṃ dukkhabhāro vahitabbo’’ti attano āyusaṅkhāre upadhāretvā parikkhīṇeti adhippāyo. Lekhaṃ katvāti caṅkame tiriyaṃ lekhaṃ katvā.
反复修习,就是应当持续练习,意思是应当不断培育。巴利
Anuyuñjethāti anuyuñjeyya, bhāveyyāti attho.
寂止随念的注释巴利
Upasamānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
239 “如是”:就是按照前面所说的方式,忆念离欲等功德。“称为一切苦寂灭的”:是说一切苦——苦苦等种种苦——都在这里寂灭,所以称为一切苦寂灭。巴利
239.Evanti yathāvuttena virāgādiguṇānussaraṇappakārena. Sabbadukkhūpasamasaṅkhātassāti dukkhadukkhādibhedaṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ upasammati etthāti sabbadukkhūpasamoti saṅkhātabbassa.
在“施设法”这一类说法里,即使是没有自性的东西,也会被智慧执持、认定,所以叫做法;为了排除这种理解,就说“法就是自性”。存在,从胜义上说,就是真实存在的状态;与这种存在一起的,就是自性,意思是从可证得的胜义角度说,是可得之色等。因为它们持有自己的自性,所以叫做法;按前面所说的意义,也叫自性。“和合”:以缘的聚合为特征而聚集到一起。“集会”:是同一个意思的另一种说法。“由缘”:由适当的缘。“所作”:被造作出来的。“非所作”:不被任何缘造作。“无为”:这里用复数形式的原因,前面已经说过。“被称为最上”:就是被称为最上,ma只是连音。应当知道,那具有无为特征的自性法就是离欲,因为染污法在这里被离弃。以涅槃为所缘而生起的圣道,所断除的慢、骄等,到达它时就被断除,所以说“依彼……灭尽”。其中,依“我更好”等想法而转起的慢,就是慢骄。依男性身份生起的骄,是男性骄。用“等”字,应当知道还包括生骄等。“无骄”:就是远离骄的状态。为了显示这个意思,所以说“无骄”。骄在这里被粉碎,达到无骄的灭尽,所以叫粉碎骄。其余几个词也是同样的道理。“欲渴”:就是对诸欲的希求,也就是欲爱。诸欲功德,众生在这里执著,所以叫欲功德窟。三地轮转,就是在三地中的业、烦恼、异熟。这就是无为法。“为种种后有”:为一种又一种的投生处等状态。系缚,就是打结。缝合,就是穿缝。出离、脱离,对于渴爱来说就是与之分离,所以说“分离”。巴利
‘‘Paññattidhammā’’tiādīsu asabhāvopi ñāṇena dhārīyati avadhārīyatīti dhammoti vuccatīti tato nivattento ‘‘dhammāti sabhāvā’’ti āha . Bhavanaṃ paramatthato vijjamānatā bhāvo, saha bhāvenāti sabhāvā, sacchikaṭṭhaparamatthato labbhamānarūpāti attho. Te hi attano sabhāvassa dhāraṇato dhammāti, yathāvuttenaṭṭhena sabhāvāti ca vuccanti. Saṅgammāti paccayasamodhānalakkhaṇena saṅgamena sannipatitvā. Samāgammāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Paccayehīti anurūpehi paccayehi. Katāti nibbattitā. Akatāti kehicipi paccayehi na katā. Asaṅkhatāti bahuvacanassa kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Aggamakkhāyatīti aggo akkhāyati, ma-kāro padasandhikaro. So asaṅkhatalakkhaṇo sabhāvadhammo virāgoti paccetabbo, virajjati ettha saṃkilesadhammoti. Nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānena ariyamaggena pahīyamānā mānamadādayo taṃ patvā pahīyanti nāmāti āha ‘‘tamāgamma…pe… vinassantī’’ti. Tattha ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1121; saṃ. ni. 4.108) maññanāvasena pavatto māno eva mānamado. Purisabhāvaṃ nissāya uppajjanakamado purisamado. Ādi-saddena jātimadādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Nimmadāti vigatamadabhāvā. Imameva hi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘amadā’’ti vuttaṃ. Madā nimmadīyanti ettha amadabhāvaṃ vināsaṃ gacchantīti madanimmadano. Eseva nayo sesapadesupi. Kāmapipāsāti kāmānaṃ pātukamyatā, kāmataṇhā. Kāmaguṇā eva āliyanti ettha sattāti kāmaguṇālayā. Tebhūmakaṃ vaṭṭanti tīsu bhūmīsu kammakilesavipākavaṭṭaṃ. Esa asaṅkhatadhammo. Aparāparabhāvāyāti aparāparaṃ yoniādito yoniādibhāvāya. Ābandhanaṃ gaṇṭhikaraṇaṃ. Saṃsibbanaṃ tunnakāraṇaṃ. Nikkhamanaṃ, nissaraṇañcassa taṇhāya visaṃyogo evāti āha ‘‘visaṃyutto’’ti.
那些把“迷醉的粉碎”等名称,依功德为相而安立在涅槃上的说法,是取上述“迷醉的粉碎”等已经成就的涅槃功德来说“依迷醉的粉碎等功德之力”,而不是说“众生由此被粉碎迷醉”这类意思。因为那些是圣道的功德。世尊说的是寂止的功德,应当这样连接理解。那么是在哪里说的呢?在《无为相应》等经中。那里说的“谛”,就是不虚妄。涅槃无论从哪方面说都不是不存在,而是绝对真实,以不颠倒之义为谛。因此说“谛只有一个,没有第二个”。“彼岸”就是轮回的对岸。因此说“已渡脱、到达彼岸、站在陆地上的婆罗门”,又说“人群中能到达彼岸的人很少”。“极难见”,是因为自性极其深奥,又极其微细寂静,没有积累足够智慧资粮的人无法见到,所以非常难见。这里没有老,或者证得此法的人没有老,所以叫“不老”。正因如此,不被老等所破坏,以坚固之义叫“恒常”。没有渴爱等戏论,所以叫“无戏论”。这里没有死,所以叫“不死”。没有那些带来不祥的杂染法,所以叫“吉祥”。不被四种轭所逼迫,所以叫“安稳”。因为是无行作的状态,所以叫“稀有”;因为前所未有,所以叫“未曾有”。一切灾祸和不利都不存在,所以叫“无灾”。没有苦,所以叫“无恼”。从一切杂染污垢中彻底清净,特别清净,所以叫“清净”。不被四种瀑流所淹没,所以叫“洲”。以从整个轮回之苦中救护之义,叫“救护”。巴利
Ye guṇe nimittaṃ katvā madanimmadanādināmāni nibbāne niruḷhāni, te madanimmadanatādike yathāvutte nibbattitanibbānaguṇe eva gahetvā āha ‘‘madanimmadanatādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ vasenā’’ti, na pana madā nimmadīyanti etenāti evamādike. Te hi ariyamaggaguṇā . Bhagavatā upasamaguṇā vuttāti sambandho. Kattha pana vuttāti? Asaṅkhatasaṃyuttādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.366 ādayo). Tattha saccanti avitathaṃ. Nibbānaṃ hi kenaci pariyāyena asantabhāvābhāvato ekaṃseneva santattā aviparītaṭṭhena saccaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ekaṃ hi saccaṃ, na dutiyamatthī’’ti (su. ni. 890). Pāranti saṃsārassa paratīrabhūtaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhati brāhmaṇo’’ti (itivu. 69), ‘‘appakā te manussesu, ye janā pāragāmino’’ti (dha. pa. 85) ca. Sududdasanti paramagambhīratāya, atisukhumasantasabhāvatāya ca anupacitañāṇasambhārehi daṭṭhuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya suṭṭhu duddasaṃ. Natthi ettha jarā, etasmiṃ vā adhigate puggalassa jarābhāvoti ajaraṃ. Tato eva jarādīhi apalokiyatāya thiraṭṭhena dhuvaṃ. Taṇhādipapañcābhāvato nippapañcaṃ. Natthi ettha matanti amataṃ. Asivabhāvakarānaṃ saṃkilesadhammānaṃ abhāvena sivaṃ. Catūhi yogehi anupaddutattā khemaṃ. Visaṅkhārabhāvena acchariyatāya, abhūtapubbatāya ca abbhutaṃ. Sabbāsaṃ ītīnaṃ anatthānaṃ abhāvena anītikaṃ. Niddukkhatāya abyābajjhaṃ. Sabbasaṃkilesamalato accantasuddhiyā visesato suddhīti visuddhi. Catūhipi oghehi anajjhottharaṇīyatāya dīpaṃ. Sakalavaṭṭadukkhato paripālanaṭṭhena tāṇaṃ.
“诸比丘,我将为你们宣说真实”等开头的巴利经文,应当理解为是简略的说法。通过“开头”这个词,把这里没有说出来的功德都收摄进来了,这些功德是由“无边际、无漏、微细、不老、不坏、无示现、殊胜、稀有、无灾法、解脱、庇护、归宿、甚深”等词语所表明的。其中,这个法没有生起,也没有灭去,所以叫“无边际”,也就是无为法。因为不是诸漏的所缘对象,所以叫“无漏”。因为是微细智慧所行的境界,所以叫“微细”。不像有为法那样会被衰老所侵蚀,所以叫“不老”。不被疾病等所破坏,所以叫“不坏”。不是眼识所能了知的,所以叫“无示现”。因为能令(众生对世间)不满足,所以叫“殊胜”。因为不常见,所以叫“稀有”。因为它的本性不会被灾患所征服,而且是无灾的因,所以叫“无灾法”。因为是轮回之苦的解脱之因,所以叫“解脱”。对于把轮回看作怖畏的人来说,它是可以藏身之处,所以叫“庇护”。正是他们的最上归趣,所以叫“归宿”。用普通的智慧无法安立,有不可测度的含义,所以叫“甚深”。即使是有福德的人,也很难理解、很难证得,所以叫“难悟”。除了亲证之外,不能用思辨的智慧来行持,所以叫“非思议行境”。只有佛等智者才能了知、才能证得,所以叫“智者所证知”。应当这样理解其中的含义。巴利
‘‘Saccañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādikā pāḷi saṃkhittāti veditabbā. Ādi-saddena anantaanāsavanipuṇaajajjaraapalokitaanidassanapaṇītaacchariyaanītikadhammamuttileṇaparāyaṇagambhīrādivacanehi ca bodhitā idha avuttā guṇā saṅgayhanti, tattha natthi etassa uppādanto vā vayanto vāti ananto, asaṅkhatadhammo. Āsavānaṃ anārammaṇatāya anāsavo. Nipuṇañāṇagocaratāya nipuṇo. Saṅkhatadhammo viya jarāya ajajjaritatāya ajajjaro. Byādhiādīhi apalokiyatāya apalokitaṃ. Acakkhuviññāṇaviññeyyatāya anidassano. Atittikaraṭṭhena paṇīto. Apacuratāya acchariyo. Ītīhi anabhibhavanīyasabhāvattā, anītikabhāvahetuto ca anītikadhammo. Vaṭṭadukkhamuttinimittatāya mutti. Saṃsāraṃ bhayato passantehi nilīyanīyato leṇaṃ. Tesaṃyeva parā gatīti parāyaṇo. Pakatiñāṇena aladdhapatiṭṭhatāya agādhaṭṭhena gambhīro. Katapuññehipi dukkhena kicchena anubujjhitabbato duranubodho. Sacchikiriyaṃ muñcitvā na takkañāṇena avacaritabboti atakkāvacaro. Buddhādīhi paṇḍiteheva veditabbato adhigantabbato paṇḍitavedanīyoti evamattho veditabbo.
只有圣弟子才能成就,因为通过亲证现观,涅槃的功德才得以显现。这里的“唯”字用在不恰当的地方,应该连接为“唯成就”。或者,从“乐成就”的角度来说,才说“唯圣弟子”。因此才说“虽然如此”等话。以寂止为重的人,就是倾向于涅槃的人。应当如理作意前面所说的寂止功德。“安乐睡眠”等说法,将在慈心论中说明。因为心倾向于涅槃,所以成为殊胜信解者。巴利
Ariyasāvakassevaijjhati sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nibbānaguṇānaṃ pākaṭabhāvato. Aṭṭhāne cāyaṃ eva-saddo vutto, ijjhati evāti yojanā. Sukhasiddhivasena vā evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘ariyasāvakassevā’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘evaṃ santepī’’tiādi. Upasamagarukenāti nibbānaninnena. Manasi kātabbā yathāvuttā upasamaguṇā. Sukhaṃ supatītiādīsu vattabbaṃ mettākathāyaṃ āvi bhavissati. Paṇītādhimuttiko hoti nibbānādhimuttattā.